Logiq-p6-Service-Manual-Sm-5245279-3
Preview — first 20 pages
You've viewed the first 20 of 478 pages
Get the complete Service manual — free download sent straight to your email.
// No spam — file + occasional library updates only
[Page 1] GE Healthcare Technical Publication Direction 5245279 Revision 3 GE Healthcare LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Service Manual Operating Documentation Copyright© 2008 by General Electric Co.
[Page 2] Page 1-2 -
[Page 3] Important Precautions • THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. • IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. WARNING • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE (EN) MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. • FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. • CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS. • SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. AVERTISSEMENT • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES é QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE (FR) MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS é Té CONSULTé ET COMPRIS. • LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAîNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPé RATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES à DES DANGERS é LECTRIQUES, Mé CANIQUES OU AUTRES. • DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. • FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENö TIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN Fü R EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. • VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERä T ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES WARNUNG KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN (DE) WURDE. • WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLä GE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN. - i
[Page 4] • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO Só LO EXISTE EN INGLé S. • SI ALGú N PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLé S, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIó N. AVISO • NO SE DEBERá DAR SERVICIO Té CNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER (ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. • LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELé CTRICAS, MECá NICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA. • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTê NCIA Té CNICA Só SE ENCONTRA DISPONíVEL EM INGLê S. • SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIç O DE ASSISTê NCIA Té CNICA, QUE Nã O A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, é DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIç OS DE TRADUç ã O. ATENÇÃO (PT) • Nã O TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTê NCIA Té CNICA. • O Nã O CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANç A DO Té CNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELé TRICOS, MECâ NICOS OU OUTROS. • IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE è DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. • SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE è TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. AVVERTENZA • SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO (IT) AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. • NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI. • KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES. • KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA Nõ UAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT Tõ LKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST. HOIATUS • ä RGE ü RITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT Kä ESOLEVA (ET) TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST. • Kä ESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE Võ IB Põ HJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA, OPERAATORI Võ I PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILö ö GI, MEHAANILISE Võ I MUU OHU TAGAJä RJEL. ii -
[Page 5] • TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI. • JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN ENGLANNINKIELISTä MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN Kä ä NNö KSEN HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA. VAROITUS • ä Lä YRITä KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT (FI) JA YMMä RTä NYT Tä Mä N HUOLTO-OHJEEN. • MIKä LI Tä Tä VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON Kä YTTä Jä N TAI POTILAAN VAHINGOITTUMINEN Sä HKö ISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI. • ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ∆ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ . • ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ , ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ . • ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ (EL) ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ . • ΕΑΝ ∆Ε ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ , ΕΝ∆ΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΝΑ ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ , ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ Ή ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ , ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟΥΣ . • EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHET Ő EL. • HA A VEV Ő SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉR Ő NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT, AKKOR A VEV Ő FELEL Ő SSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE. FIGYELMEZTETÉS • NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A (HU) KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK. • EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ, M Ű KÖDTET Ő VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI. • ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU. • EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU. VIÐVÖRUN • REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG (IS) SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK. • EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS, VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU. - iii
[Page 6] • TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKé M JAZYCE. • V P ř íPAD ě , ŽE POSKYTOVATEL SLUŽEB ZÁKAZNÍK Ů M POT ř EBUJE Ná VOD V JINé M JAZYCE, JE ZAJIšT ě Ní P ř EKLADU DO ODPOVíDAJíCíHO JAZYKA ú KOLEM Zá KAZNíKA. • NEPROVÁD Ě JTE ú DRŽBU TOHOTO ZA ř íZENí, ANIŽ BYSTE SI P ř E č ETLI VÝSTRAHA TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH. (CS) • V P ř íPAD ě NEDODRŽOVá Ní Té TO VýSTRAHY M ů ŽE DOJíT ÚRAZU ELEKTRICKÁM PROUDEM PRACOVNíKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUŽEB, OBSLUŽNé HO PERSONá LU NEBO PACIENT ů VLIVEM ELEKTRICKé HOP PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO JINÉMU RIZIKU. • DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK. • HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE. ADVARSEL • FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE (DA) DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET. • MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN. • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR. • ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN. • PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE WAARSCHUWING (NL) ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS. • INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN. • š Ī APKALPES ROKASGR Ā MATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANG Ļ U VALOD Ā . • JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZ Ē JAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORM Ā CIJA CIT Ā VALOD Ā , NEVIS ANG Ļ U, KLIENTA PIEN Ā KUMS IR NODROŠIN Ā T TULKOŠANU. BR Ī DIN Ā JUMS • NEVEICIET APR Ī KOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGR Ā MATAS (LV) IZLAS Ī ŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS. • Š Ī BR Ī DIN Ā JUMA NEIEV Ē ROŠANA VAR RAD Ī T ELEKTRISK Ā S STR Ā VAS TRIECIENA, MEH Ā NISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAIS Ī TU TRAUMU APKALPES SNIEDZ Ē JAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM. iv -
[Page 7] • ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA IŠLEISTAS TIK ANGL Ų KALBA. • JEI KLIENTO PASLAUG Ų TEIK Ė JUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE ANGL Ų , VERTIMU PASIR Ū PINTI TURI KLIENTAS. Į SP Ė JIMAS • NEM Ė GINKITE ATLIKTI Į RANGOS TECHNIN Ė S PRIEŽI Ū ROS DARB Ų , NEBENT (LT) VADOVAUTUM Ė T Ė S ŠIUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR J Į SUPRASTUM Ė TE • NEPAISANT ŠIO PERSP Ė JIMO, PASLAUG Ų TEIK Ė JAS, OPERATORIUS AR PACIENTAS GALI B Ū TI SUŽEISTAS D Ė L ELEKTROS SM Ū GIO, MECHANINI Ų AR KIT Ų PAVOJ Ų . • DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK. • HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE. ADVARSEL • IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE (NO) SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT. • MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER. • NINIEJSZY PODR Ę CZNIK SERWISOWY DOST Ę PNY JEST JEDYNIE W J Ę ZYKU ANGIELSKIM. • JE ś LI FIRMA ś WIADCZ Ą CA KLIENTOWI US ł UGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA UDOST ę PNIENIA PODR ę CZNIKA W J ę ZYKU INNYM NI Ż ANGIELSKI, OBOWI Ą ZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO T ł UMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA KLIENCIE. OSTRZE Ż ENIE • NIE PRó BOWA ć SERWISOWA ć NINIEJSZEGO SPRZ ę TU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO (PL) ZAPOZNANIA SI ę Z PODR ę CZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM. • NIEZASTOSOWANIE SI ę DO TEGO OSTRZE Ż ENIA MO ż E GROZI ć OBRA Ż ENIAMI CIA ł A SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU PORA Ż ENIA PR Ą DEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU ZAGRO Ż E ń . • ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZ Ă . • DAC Ă UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIEN Ţ I NECESIT Ă O ALT Ă LIMB Ă DECÂT CEA ENGLEZ Ă , ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI S Ă FURNIZEZE O TRADUCERE. ATEN Ţ IE • NU ÎNCERCA Ţ I S Ă REPARA Ţ I ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR (RO) CONSULT Ă RII Ş I ÎN Ţ ELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE. • IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA R Ă NIREA DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALT Ă NATUR Ă . - v
[Page 8] • Да н н о е рук о в о дс т в о п о о б с луж и в а н и ю ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТСЯ т о ль к о н а а н г ли й с к о м Яз ы к е . • Ес ли с е рв и с н о МУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ к ли е н т а н е о б х о димо рук о в о дс т в о н е н а а н г ли йс к о м ЯЗЫКЕ , к ли е н т у с ле дуе т с а мо с т о Ят е ль н о ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ п е ре в о д . ОСТОРОЖНО ! • ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО ОБРАТИТЕСЬ (RU) К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ . • НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ УКАЗАННЫХ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ МОЖЕТ ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ , ЧТО СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ТЕХОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ , ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЗЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ , МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ . • TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRU Č KA JE K DISPOZíCII LEN V ANGLI Č TINE. • AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATE Ľ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO ANGLI Č TINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATE Ľ SKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOS Ť OU ZÁKAZNÍKA. UPOZORNENIE • NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVA Ť SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI (SK) NEPRE Č ÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRU Č KU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ. • ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA Mô ŽE VYÚSTI Ť DO ZRANENIA POSKYTOVATE Ľ A SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJú CEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA ELEKTRICKýM PRú DOM, PRÍPADNE DO MECHANICKé HO ALEBO INé HO NEBEZPE č ENSTVA. • DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA. • OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER. VARNING • FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST (SV) OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN. • OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR. • BU SERV İ S KILAVUZU YALNIZCA İ NG İ L İ ZCE OLARAK SA Ğ LANMI Ş TIR. • E Ğ ER MÜ Ş TER İ TEKN İ SYEN İ KILAVUZUN İ NG İ L İ ZCE DI Ş INDAK İ B İ R D İ LDE OLMASINI İ STERSE, KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETT İ RMEK MÜ Ş TER İ N İ N SORUMLULU Ğ UNDADIR. D İ KKAT • SERV İ S KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EK İ PMANLARA MÜDAHALE (TR) ETMEY İ N İ Z. • BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI ED İ LMES İ , ELEKTR İ K ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKAN İ K VEYA D İĞ ER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKN İ SYEN İ N, OPERATÖRÜN YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇAB İ L İ R. vi -
[Page 9] (JA) (ZH-CN) (KO) - vii
[Page 10] DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. OMISSIONS & ERRORS If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to: Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA. GE Healthcare employees should use the iTrak System to report all documentation errors or omissions. SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. WARNING WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury. For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section in the Service Manual. viii -
[Page 11] LEGAL NOTES The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Healthcare. GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice. TRADEMARKS All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders. COPYRIGHTS All Material Copyright© 2004 and 2008 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved. - ix
[Page 12] Revision History Revision Date Reason for change 1 30 JAN 2008 Initial Release. 2 APR2008 Addition Functional Check Procedure 3 12 DEC 2008 BT09 Release List of Effected Pages(LOEP) Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision Title Page 3 4-1 to 4-49 3 10-1 to 10-30 3 Warnings i to ii-x 3 5-1 to 5-44 3 Back Cover N/A TOC vii to 3 6-1 to 6-4 3 1-1 to 1-20 3 7-1 to 7-42 3 2-1 to 2-12 3 8-1 to 8-204 3 3-1 to 3-26 3 9-1 to 9-22 3 x -
[Page 13] Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 Introduction Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Important Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 WEEE Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 EMC, EMI, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 CHAPTER 2 Pre-Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Purpose of chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Recommended and Alternate Ultrasound Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 - Page 1-1
[Page 14] CHAPTER 3 Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 Installation Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Moving into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Adjusting System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Product Locator Installation Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Power Off/ Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Transducer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 External I/O Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Setting VCR (Mitsubishi MD3000) USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Insite IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Loading Base System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Page 1-2 -
[Page 15] System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Image Management (QG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Using the DVD-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 ECG Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Monitor Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 17" LCDMON II Assy & LCD Panel with filter Function Validation Procedure . . . . 4-22 17" OSD Key Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Keyboard Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Trackball Assy validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 A/N Key assy validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Freeze key validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Cover Parts Function Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Air filter set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 TGC key assy/TGC Knob set, Sub keyboard encoder Knob Set, keycap set, Main keyboard Encoder Knob set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Cup holder Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Front caster/Rear caster Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 New articulation arm with cover Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Board Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 PI128II Assy function check procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 DTRX64II Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 CWD64 Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 APS II Assy PCB Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 SOM Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 RFC Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 BP128 Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Nest fan Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Transbox/ Fan Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 DTRX Cooler with heatsink Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 ACPC II Assy set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 AP950 Transbox Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Fuse set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 ARPII Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 - Page 1-3
[Page 16] CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 Block Diagrams and Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Power Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 TRANSBOX(AC Power, AP950) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 APS II (LV Power & HV Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 AC Power Outlet for Peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 SYSCONML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 P6 ARP II (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Input/Output Signals for peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Internal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Peripherals connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 iGlobal Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 RFS (Service For Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 System Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Sending RFS Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Page 1-4 -
[Page 17] CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Purpose of this chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Monitor Arm Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Trackball Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics / Trouble shooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Check and Record the P2 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Setting the P2 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Reset the P2 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Check and Record the P2 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Setting the P2 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Capturing a Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Reset the P2 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 FRU Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 DTRX64II Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 PI128 II Assy (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 P3RLY Assy (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro PRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 SYSCONML Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 APS II Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Trouble Shooting Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 System Does Not Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Noise in Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Unable to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 - Page 1-5
[Page 18] Unable to Record to VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36 Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37 DVD-RW Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39 Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40 CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures Overview 8-1 Purpose of Chapter 8 8-1 DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-2 17 Inch monitor cover set 8-3 OSD button 8-7 17 INCH LCDMON ASSY 8-10 New Articulation arm with cover installation Procedure 8-12 New Articulation cover set installation Procedure 8-32 Main Keyboard Assy 8-36 Sub Keyboard Assy 8-38 Trackball Assy 8-39 English, Greek, Russian, Swedish, Norweigian A/N Key assy 8-40 Freeze key assy 8-42 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set 8-43 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set 8-45 Keycap set, Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set 8-46 Right or Left Side Cover 8-47 Front Cover 8-49 Rear Cover 8-51 Middle Cover 8-52 Top Cover 8-53 Top Bottom Cover 8-54 Pole Cover 8-55 Neck Front 8-56 Neck Rear 8-58 Dummy Cover L / R 8-60 EMI Cover L and R 8-62 APS II Assy 8-63 DTRX64II Assy 8-65 P3RLY/PI128II Assy 8-67 BP128 Assy 8-69 CWD64 Assy 8-71 SYSCONML Assy 8-72 SOM Replacement 8-75 RFC Assy 8-77 Front Caster / Rear Caster 8-78 Rear Handle 8-80 Rear Hook 8-81 Probe Holder 8-82 Cup Holder 8-83 ECG Cable Hook 8-84 Page 1-6 -
[Page 19] Air Filter Set 8-85 DVD R/W Drive 8-86 NEST FAN Assy 8-88 ARP II Assy 110V/220V 8-90 SATA HDD Assy 8-92 ACPC II Assy 8-94 AP950 Assy 8-96 Fuse Set 8-99 Read and Write Serial Info 8-100 Software Loading Procedure 8-103 General 8-103 Parts Required 8-103 TimeRequired 8-103 Software Loading Steering Guide 8-104 Before Starting Software Loading 8-105 Software Installation 8-111 Installing Base Image Software 8-111 Verifying Base Image Software 8-116 Installing Application Software (R2.x.x) 8-122 Standard Confirmation & Functional Checks 8-125 Full Backup / Restore Procedure 8-140 General 8-140 Parts Required 8-140 Full Backup Procedure 8-140 Restore procedure 8-143 Software Reloading 8-144 General 8-144 Software Reloading Procedure 8-144 Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-154 Flexible LCD Arm installation Procedure 8-155 Endo Probe Holder Installation 8-174 Microphone Option fixture Installation 8-175 Drawer Option installation 8-176 Cable Arm Hook installation 8-177 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 8-178 BW printer Fixture Middle installation 8-181 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP23MD Printer 8-183 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer 8-186 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer 8-189 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-3000) 8-192 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) 8-197 Rear Handle installation 8-199 Additional Task Lamp installation 8-201 Protect Cover Installation 8-203 Final Procedures 8-204 - Page 1-7
[Page 20] CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 NEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 CHAPTER 10 Care and Maitenance Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Standard GE Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 GEMS Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14 Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22 Page 1-8 -
[Page 21] Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 - Page 1-9
[Page 22] Page 1-10 -
[Page 23] Chapter 1 Introduction Section 1-1 Overview 1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1 This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit. Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1 Section Description Page Number 1-1 Overview 1-1 1-2 Important Conventions 1-3 1-3 Safety Considerations 1-12 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-17 1-5 Customer Assistance 1-18 1-1-2 Purpose of Service Manual This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Ultrasound Scanning System and contains the following chapters: 1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction : Contains a content summary and warnings. 2.) Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. 3.) Chapter 3 - Installation: Contains installation procedures. 4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance. 5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) : Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics. 6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments : Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. 7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting : Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. 8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU). 9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ P6/ P6 Pro. 10.) Chapter 10 - Periodic Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. Section 1-1 - Overview 1-1
[Page 24] 1-1-3 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual • Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.) • Hospital’s Service Personnel • Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation) 1-1-4 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Models Covered by this Manual Table 1-2 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Model Designations Part Number Descritpion 5329629 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Europe 5329630 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Asia_Taiwan 5329631 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for India 5329632 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Japan 5329633 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for China 5329634 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Asia 5329635 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Latin A 5329636 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Latin B 5329637 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for USA 5329638 LOGIQ™ P6 BT09 for Korea 5329639 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Europe 5329640 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Asia_Taiwan 5329641 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for India 5329642 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Japan 5329643 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for China 5329644 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Asia 5329645 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Latin A 5329646 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Latin B 5329647 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for USA 5329648 LOGIQ™ P6Pro BT09 for Korea 1-1-5 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro and also kept near the unit for quick reference. 1-2 Section 1-1 - Overview
[Page 25] Section 1-2 Important Conventions 1-2-1 Conventions Used in Book Icons Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter. Safety Precaution Messages Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways: DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED. WARNING WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED. CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored. NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example : Disk drive will crash. NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-3
[Page 26] 1-2-2 Standard Hazard Icons Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm. Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION LASER HEAT PINCH LASER LIGHT Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed. Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION TAG LOCKOUT EYE PROTECTION Signed Date 1-4 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 27] 1-2-3 Product Icons The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment. Table 1-5 Product Icons LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION Manufacturer's name and address Rear of console near power inlet Date of manufacture Identification and Rating Plate Under monitor Model and serial numbers On each probe Electrical ratings Laboratory logo or labels denoting Rear of console Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety standards Under front of monitor such as UL or IEC. Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. Indicates the degree of protection provided by IP Code (IPX8) the enclosure per IEC 529. IPX8 indicates drip Footswitch proof. Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates equipment having a ECG connector high degree of protection suitable for direct Surgical probes cardiac contact. Defibrillator IEC60601-2-27 "CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to Various advise or warn the user. ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents " is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other Various instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label. "CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is Various used to indicate electric shock hazards. "Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of Rear of system adjacent to mains switch the mains power switch. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-5
[Page 28] Table 1-5 Product Icons LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION "OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/ standby position of the power switch. CAUTION Adjacent to On-Off/Standby Switch This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply "Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch. "ON" Indicates the power on position of the power switch. Front Panel Switch This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply "Protective Earth" Indicates the protective Internal earth (grounding) terminal. Product schematics Indicates an earth GROUND potential Peripherals 1-6 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 29] 1-2-4 WEEE Label The following table describes the meaning of WEEE label and its translation provided on the equipment. This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. English Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment. Tento symbol znamená, že díly elektrických nebo elektronických za ř ízení Czech (CZE) nesmí být likvidovány do net ř íd ě ného odpadu, ale musí být likvidovány samostatn ě . Obra ť te se prosím na autorizovaného p ř edstavitele výrobce, který poskytne informace týkající se likvidace vašeho p ř ístroje. Dette symbol angiver, at elektrisk og elektronisk affald ikke må Danish (DAN) bortskaffes som usorteret brændbart affald, men skal indsamles særskilt. Kontakt venligst en autoriseret repræsentant for producenten for at få oplysninger om, hvordan dit udstyr skal bortskaffes. Dit symbool geeft aan dat het afval van elektrische en elektronische apparatuur niet ongescheiden mag worden meegegeven met het Dutch (DUT) huisvuil, maar apart moet worden ingeleverd. Neem contact op met een erkende vertegenwoordiger van de fabrikant voor informatie over het inleveren van uw apparatuur. Aquest símbol indica que els residus dels equips elèctrics i electrònics Catalan (CAT) s'han d'abocar per separat, no com a residus municipals no classificats. Contacteu amb un representant autoritzat del fabricant per obtenir informació sobre com desfer-vos del vostre equip. Chinese (CHN) See märk näitab, et tarbetuks muutunud elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmeid Estonian (EST) ei tohi ära visata sortimata olmejäätmetena, vaid need tuleb eraldi kokku koguda. Seadmete käitlemise kohta küsige lisateavet tootja volitatud esindajalt. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-7
[Page 30] Tämä kuvatunnus ilmaisee, että sillä merkittyä sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaitetta ei saa hävittää lajittelemattomana yhdyskuntajätteenä Finnish (FIN) vaan se on kerättävä talteen erikseen. Ota yhteyttä tuotteen valmistajan valtuuttamaan myyntiedustajaan ja kysy lisätietoja laitteen käytöstä poistosta. Ce symbole indique que les déchets relatifs à l'équipement électrique et French- France électronique ne doivent pas être jetés comme les ordures ménagères (FRA) non-triées et doivent être collectés séparément. Contactez un repré sentant agréé du fabricant pour obtenir des informations sur la mise au rebut de votre équipement. Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet elektrische und elektronische Geräte, die nicht mit dem gewöhnlichen, unsortierten Hausmüll entsorgt werden dü German (GER) rfen, sondern separat behandelt werden müssen. Bitte nehmen Sie Kontakt mit einem autorisierten Beauftragten des Herstellers auf, um Informationen hinsichtlich der Entsorgung Ihres Gerätes zu erhalten. Αυτό το σύ μ βολο υποδηλώνει ότι τα απόβλητα ηλεκτρικού και ηλεκτρονικού εξ οπλισ μ ού δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτονται ως κοινά απορρί μ ατα , αλλά να συλλέγον Greek (GRE) ται ξεχωριστά . Παρακαλού μ ε επικοινωνήστε μ ε έναν εξουσιοδοτη μ ένο αντιπρό σωπο του κατασκευαστή για πληροφορίες σχετικά μ ε την απόρριψη του εξοπλισ μ ού . A szimbólum azt jelzi, hogy az elektromos és elektronikus készülék hulladékát Hungarian tilos nem szelektív lakossági hulladékként kezelni, hanem elkülönítve kell gy ű (HUN) jteni. Kérjük, a berendezés leselejtezését illet ő leg lépjen kapcsolatba a gyártó hivatalos képviseletével. Merki þetta táknar að rafeindatækjum skal eytt á sérstakan máta, ekki m Icelandic (ICE) á losa rafeindatæki í hefðbundin sorphirðuílát sem óflokkað sorp. Vinsamlega hafið samband við umboðsmann framleiðanda fyrir upplý singar um hvernig tækinu skal eytt. 1-8 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 31] Questo simbolo indica che i rifiuti derivanti da apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche non devono essere smaltiti come rifiuti municipali indifferenziati e Italian (ITA) devono invece essere raccolti separatamente. Per informazioni relative alle modalità di smantellamento delle apparecchiature fuori uso, contattare un rappresentante autorizzato del fabbricante. Japanese (JPN) Šis apz ī m ē jums nor ā da, ka no elektrisk ā un elektronisk ā apr ī kojuma atkritumiem nedr ī kst atbr ī voties k ā no neš ķ irotiem m ā jsaimniec ī bas Latvian (LAT) atkritumiem un tie ir j ā sav ā c atseviš ķ i. L ū dzu, sazinieties ar pilnvarotu raž ot ā ja p ā rst ā vi, lai sa ņ emtu inform ā ciju par apr ī kojuma ekspluat ā cijas p ā rtraukšanu. Šis simbolis nurodo, kad elektros ir elektronin ė s į rangos atliekos turi b ū ti Lithuanian surenkamos atskirai ir negali b ū ti šalinamos kaip ner ū šiuotos savivaldyb ė (LIT) s tvarkomos atliekos. Informacijos apie į rangos veikimo sustabdym ą kreipkit ė s į į galiot ą j į gamintojo atstov ą . Dette symbolet angir at elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr ikke skal kastes Norwegian som restavfall, men må leveres inn separat. Ta kontakt med en autorisert (NOR) representant for produsenten hvis du vil ha informasjon om hvordan utstyret skal avhendes. Ten symbol oznacza, i ż sk ł adowanie zu ż ytych urz ą dze ń elektrycznych i Polish (POL) elektronicznych wraz z ogólnymi odpadami miejskimi jest zabronione. Informacji na temat miejsc sk ł adowania tego typu odpadów udziela producent sprz ę tu. Este símbolo indica que os resíduos do equipamento elétrico e eletrônico Portuguese- não devem ser descartados no sistema de coleta de lixo municipal, e sim Brazilian (POB) coletados separadamente. Favor entrar em contato com um representante autorizado do fabricante para obter informações sobre como descartar seu equipamento. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-9
[Page 32] Acest simbol indic ă faptul c ă de ş eurile de echipamente electrice ş i Romanian electronice nu au voie s ă fie aruncate nediferen ţ iat ca gunoi menajer ş i c (ROM) ă ele trebuie colectate separat. V ă rug ă m s ă lua ţ i leg ă tura cu un reprezentant autorizat al produc ă torului pentru a ob ţ ine informa ţ ii referitoare la eliminarea ecologic ă a echipamentului dumneavoastr ă . Символ обозначает : недопустимо выбрасывать электрическое и эле ктронное оборудование с неотсортированным бытовым мусором . Он Russian (RUS) о должно собираться отдельно . Для получения сведений об утилиза ции оборудования обратитесь к авторизованному представителю ко мпании - производителя . Ovaj simbol ozna č ava da se otpad elektri č ne i elektronske opreme ne sme odlagati zajedno sa obi č nim gradskim sme ć em, ve ć se mora Serbian (SCC) pokupiti posebno. Molimo vas da kontaktirate ovlaš ć enog predstavnika proizvo đ a č a svoje opreme, kako bi ste se informisali o njenom pravilnom rashodu. Tento symbol ozna č uje, že odpad elektrického a elektronického materiá Slovakian lu sa nesmie vyhadzova ť do netriedeného komunálneho odpadu, ale mus (SLK) í sa likvidova ť oddelene. Viac informácií o likvidácii vášho zariadenia vám poskytne poverený zástupca výrobcu. Ta simbol obeležava da se elektronski otpad in elektronska oprema ne sme Slovenian odlagati skup z navadnim mesnim otpadom, ter se mora pobrat posebej. Prosimo (SLN) vas da kontaktirate pooblaš č enega prodajalca opreme, kako bi se informirali o njenem pravilnem rashodu. Este símbolo indica que el equipo eléctrico y electrónico no debe tirarse Spanish-Spain con los desechos domésticos y debe tratarse por separado. Contacte (SPA) con el representante local del fabricante para obtener más información sobre la forma de desechar el equipo. Denna symbol anger att elektriska och elektroniska utrustningar inte får avyttras Swedish som osorterat hushållsavfall och måste samlas in separat. Var god kontakta en (SWE) auktoriserad tillverkarrepresentant för information angående avyttring av utrustningen. 1-10 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 33] Bu sembol, elektrikli ve elektronik ekipmanlar ı n s ı n ı fland ı r ı lmam ı ş çöp Turkish (TUR) olarak at ı lmamas ı ve ayr ı olarak toplanmas ı gerekti ğ ini belirtir. Lütfen ekipman ı n ı z ı n imhas ı yla ilgili olarak üreticinin yetkili temsilcisine ba ş vurun. The symbol is affixed to a battery to advise the user or owner thar it must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. English The letter below indicates the toxic element (Pb=Lead, Cd=Cadmium, Hg=Mercury) that is contained in the battery that may require special recycling or disposal method, Please contact a GEHC representative to facilitate servicing, removal and disposal options. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-11
[Page 34] Section 1-3 Safety Considerations 1-3-1 Introduction The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. 1-3-2 Human Safety Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Training are authorized to service the equipment. 1-3-3 Mechanical Safety WARNING WARNING WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER. WARNING WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. WARNING WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT MAY BE DAMAGED. CAUTION Always lower and center the Opertaor I/O Panel before moving the scanner. CAUTION The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro weighs 80 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, (176 lbs., or more) when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage. ALWAYS: Be sure the pathway is clear. Use slow, careful motions. Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs). CAUTION There is a pinch point in LCD monitor. Need care for injury on hands or fingers in flipping down the LCD monitor. 1-12 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
[Page 35] 1-3-3 Mechanical Safety (cont’d) NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle: • Secure the unit in an upright position. • Lock the wheels (brake) • DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point. • Place the probes in their carrying case. • Eject DVD media from the system. CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor. 1-3-4 Electrical Safety To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating. The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SERVICE OR DISASSEMBLE PARTS UNDER FRU UNIT LEVEL AT ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations 1-13
[Page 36] 1-3-5 Label Locations Figure 1-1 OUTSIDE MARKINGS OF LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro (Rear) 1.) Identification and Rating Plate - USA/Asia 120V Console 2.) Identification and Rating Plate - Europe/Asia/Latin America 220V Console 3.) Identification and Rating Plate - Japan 100V Console 4.) Identification and Rating Plate - Korea 220V Console 5.) Identification and Rating Plate - China 220V Console 6.) UL Label 1-14 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
[Page 37] 1-3-5 Label Locations (cont’d) Figure 1-2 OUTSIDE MARKINGS OF LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro 1.) Possible Shock Hazard 2.) Label -”Do not use the following devices near this equipment.” 3.) Label - “The equipment weighs approximately 80kg. 4.) Prescription Devices 5.) CE Mark Label (Left), WEEE Label (Right) 6.) CISPR Label 7.) Groud reliability Label 8.) Voltage Range Indicationand Power indication Label 9.) LCD Caution Label 10.)LCD Arm Rotation Label Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations 1-15
[Page 38] 1-3-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed. DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. WARNING WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT. 1-3-7 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains plug. 1-16 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
[Page 39] Section 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-4-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply. 1-4-2 CE Compliance The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements. For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual. NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance. 1-4-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS: 1.ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF THE POWER CONNECTOR). 2.FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. Section 1-4 - EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-17
[Page 40] Section 1-5 Customer Assistance 1-5-1 Contact Information If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below. Prepare the following information before you call: - System ID serial number. - Software version. Table 1-7 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance Location Phone Number 1-800–437–1171 USA/ Canada GE Healthcare Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 1-800-682-5327 Customer Answer Center 1-262-524-5698 Fax: +1-414-647-4125 1-262-524-5300 Latin America GE Healthcare Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 1-262-524-5698 Customer Answer Center Fax: +1-414-647-4125 Europe Tel: +49 212 2802 208 GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG +49 212 2802 207 BeethovenstraBe 239 Postfach 11 05 60, D-42665 Solingen Germany Fax: +49 212 2802 431 Tel: +65 291-8528 Asia (Singapore/ Japan) +81 426-482950 GE Ultrasound Asia Service Department - Ultrasound 298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 Central Plaza Fax: +65 272-3997 Singapore 169730 +81 426-482902 1-18 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
[Page 41] 1-5-2 System Manufacturer Table 1-8 System Manufacturer Manufacturer FAX Number GE Ultrasound Korea 462-120 65-1, Sangdaewon-dong, Joong-won-Gu, 82-31-740-6436 Seongnam-Si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance 1-19
[Page 42] This page was intentionally left blank. 1-20 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
[Page 43] Chapter 2 Pre-Installation Section 2-1 Overview 2-1-1 Purpose of chapter 2 This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ P6/ P6 Pro. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit. A checklist is also provided at the end of this section to help determine whether the proper planning and preparation is accomplished before the actual equipment installation is scheduled. Table 2-1 Contents in Chapter 2 Section Description Page Number 2-1 Overview 2-1 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2 2-3 Facility Needs 2-7 Section 2-1 - Overview 2 - 1
[Page 44] Section 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements for LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Scanners Operational Storage Transport o o o 10 - 30 C -10 - 60 C -40 - 60 C Temperature o o o 50 - 86 F 14 - 140 F -40 - 140 F 30 - 85% 30 - 90% 30 - 90% Humidity non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing Pressure 700 - 1060hPa 700 - 1060hPa 700 - 1060hPa Table 2-3 Environmental Requirements for an Ultrasound Room Item Values Power Source refer to Table 2-4 on page 2-3. Current Rating 10.0A (100V-120V); 5.5A (220-240V) Radiation Shielding NONE REQUIRED for ULTRASOUND ENERGY Temperature 20-26 DEG. C (68-79 DEG F) for PATIENT COMFORT Humidity 50% to 70% for PATIENT COMFORT Heat Dissipation 2000 BTU/Hr. Floor Landing Approximately 680 - 800 kg/m 2 without Accessories Floor Condition Gradient: WITHIN 5 degrees Weight 80 kg (176lbs) without Accessories 2-2-1-1 Cooling The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro is 2000 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system. 2-2-1-2 Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and diameters can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interface. 2 - 2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
[Page 45] 2-2-2 Electrical Requirements NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. 2-2-2-1 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Power Requirements The following power line parameters should be monitored for one week before installation. We recommend that you use an analyzer Dranetz Model 606-3 or Dranetz Model 626: Table 2-4 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro PARAMETER AREA LIMITS 100~120V 100~120 VAC ± 10% (90-132 VAC) Voltage Range 220~240V 220-240 VAC ± 10% (198-264 VAC) Power All applications MAX. 950 VA Line Frequency All applications 50/60Hz ( ± 2Hz) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of Power Transients All applications transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients. Less than 15% of peak voltage for less Decaying Oscillation All applications than 1 millisecond. 2-2-2-2 Inrush Current Inrush Current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies. 2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be ready accessible. CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCURE. The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit. Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements 2 - 3
[Page 46] 2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets A desiccated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes. 2-2-2-5 Unit Power Plug If the unit arrives without the power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required. 2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms. Power Transients (All applications) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients. 2 - 4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
[Page 47] 2-2-3 EMI Limitations Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transient in the air wiring. They also generate EMI. The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interface will not occur in a particular installation. Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed. Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of defect. These sources include: • medical lasers, • scanners, • cauterizing guns, • computers, • monitors, • fans, • gel warmers, • microwave ovens, • light dimmers, • portable phones. The presence of broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference. See for EMI Prevention tips. See Table 2-5 for EMI Prevention tips. Table 2-5 EMI Prevention/abatement EMI Rule Details Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding Be aware of RF sources may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals. Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of Ground the unit the power cord and power outlet. After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Replace all screws, RF Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the gaskets, covers, cores shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interface with the ultrasound signals. If more than 20% or a pair of fingers on the RF gaskets are broken, replace the gaskets. Replace broken RF gaskets Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed. Do not place labels where RF Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit gaskets touch metal RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label. Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, and peripherals cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified. Take care with cellular phones Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts. Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Properly dress peripheral Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables cables to the frame. Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements 2 - 5
[Page 48] 2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements Operation:10° to 30° C Storage:-10° to 60° C NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32). NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF -10 TO + 60 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE. 2 - 6 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
[Page 49] Section 2-3 Facility Needs 2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery. User the Pre Installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken, Purchaser reasonability includes: • Procuring the materials required. • Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system. • Paying the costs for any alternations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract. NOTE: All electrical installation that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these product must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. The desire to use a non-listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferable prior to purchase). The ultrasound suite must be clean proof to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system. Section 2-3 - Facility Needs 2 - 7
[Page 50] 2-3-2 Required Features NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. • Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the unit’s proposed location • Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide • Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling • Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables. NOTE: The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro has two outlets outside the unit. Both are for on board peripherals. • Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack) • Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal) 2 - 8 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
[Page 51] 2-3-3 Desirable Features • Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide • Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible • Sink with hot and cold water • Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths • Emergency oxygen supply • Storage for linens and equipment • Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room • Dual level lighting (bright and dim) • Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals. Section 2-3 - Facility Needs 2 - 9
[Page 52] 2-3-4 Recommended and Alternate Ultrasound Room Layout Recommended standard floor plan and a minimal floor plan for ultrasound equipment: Figure 2-1 RECOMMENDED ULTRASOUND ROOM LAYOUT 2 - 10 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
[Page 53] 2-3-5 Networking Pre-installation Requirements 2-3-5-1 Purpose of DICOM Network Function DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost. 2-3-5-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements To configure the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide some necessary information. Information must include: • A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. • The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION. • The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors. Section 2-3 - Facility Needs 2 - 11
[Page 54] 2-3-5-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements (cont’d) LOGIQ™ Host Name Local Port IP Address . . . AE Title Net Mask . . . ROUTING INFORMATION GATEWAY IP Addresses Destination IP Addresses Default . . . ROUTER1 . . . . . . ROUTER2 . . . . . . ROUTER3 . . . . . . DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION NAME MAKE/REVISION AE TITLE IP ADDRESSES PORT Store 1 . . . Store 2 . . . Store 3 . . . Store 4 . . . Store 5 . . . Store 6 . . . Worklist . . . Storage . . . Commit MPPS . . . Figure 2-2 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information 2 - 12 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
[Page 55] Chapter 3 Installation Section 3-1Overview 3-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 3 This chapter contains information needed to install the unit. Included are references to a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim. How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual installation, and how to check and test the unit, probes, and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure. Also included in this section are guidelines for transporting the unit to a new site. Table 3-1 Contents in Chapter 3 Section Description Page Number 3-1 Overview 3-1 3-2 Installation Reminders 3-2 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4 3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-10 3-5 Completing the Installation 3-11 3-6 System Configuration 3-15 3-7 Available Probes 3-22 3-8 Software/Option Configuration 3-22 3-9 Connectivity Installation Worksheet 3-23 3-10 Insite IP Address Configuration 3-24 3-11 Loading Base System Software 3-24 3-12 Warnings 3-24 3-13 Paperwork 3-25 Section 3-1 - Overview 3-1
[Page 56] Section 3-2Installation Reminders 3-2-1 Average Installation Time Table 3-2 Average Installation Time Description Average Installation Time Comments Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hour Scanner wo/options 0.5 hour Dependant on the configuration that is required DICOM Option 0.5 hour Dependant on the amount of configuration InSite Option 0.5 hour The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro has been designed to be installed and checked out by an experienced service technician in approximately four hours. LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro consoles with optional equipment may take slightly longer. 3-2-2 Installation Warnings 1.) Since the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro weighs approximately 80 kg.(176 lb) without options, preferably two people should unpack it. Two people are also preferable for installing any additional bulky items. 2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting. NOTE: For information regarding packing labels, refer to LABELS ON PACKAGE. 3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5 ° C increment it's temperature is below 10 ° C or above 30 ° C. CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged. Table 3-3 Acclimation Time ° C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 ° F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40 hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 3-2 Section 3-1 - Overview
[Page 57] 3-2-3 Safety Reminders DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT! CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 19kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted. CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment. CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding. CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present. CAUTION Do not use a 10 Amp to 7 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 10 A circuit and can have a 7 A plug if the on board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 6 amps. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this. CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ P6/ P6 Pro and kept near the unit for quick reference. CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage. Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels Section 3-1 - Overview 3-3
[Page 58] Section 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment When a new system arrives, check that any components are not damaged and are not in short supply. If shipping damage or shortage occurs, contact the address shown in Chapter 1. CAUTION Do not lift the unit by the Keyboard. Equipment damage may result. CAUTION The crate with the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro weighs approximately 80 Kg (176 lb). Be prepared for a sudden shift of weight as the unit is removed from its base (pallet) 1.) Cut the four PLASTIC BANDs. Plastic Bands Figure 3-2 Cutting the Plastic Bands. 3-4 Section 3-1 - Overview
[Page 59] 2.) Lift the TOP COVER up and off. Top Cover Figure 3-3 Removing the top Cover Section 3-1 - Overview 3-5
[Page 60] 3.) Remove the Top Plate up and off. Top Plate Figure 3-4 Removing the Top Plate 3-6 Section 3-1 - Overview
[Page 61] 4.) Remove the three PLASTIC JOINTs from the OUTER SLEEVE. 5.) Remove the OUTER SLEEVE. Plastic Joint Outer Sleeve Palette Assy Figure 3-5 Removing Plastic Joints and Sleeves Section 3-1 - Overview 3-7
[Page 62] 6.) Remove the MONITOR SUPPORTER and Option Box. 7.) Remove the PLASTIC BAG. 8.) Unlock the front caster and carefully put the console off the PALETTE. Monitor Pad Figure 3-6 Moving the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro from the crate 3-8 Section 3-1 - Overview
[Page 63] 3-3-1 Moving into Position CAUTION Do not lift the unit by the Keyboard. Do not tilt the unit more than 5 degrees to avoid tipping it over. To avoid injury by tipping over. Set the monitor to the lowest position before moving. CAUTION Equipment Damage Possibility. Lifting the console by holding covers may damage the covers. Do not lift the console by holding any covers. In general, a single adult can move the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro along an even surface with no steep grades. At least two people should move the machine when large humps, grooves, or grades will be encountered. (It is better to pull from the rear rather than push from the front of the unit). Before moving, store all loose parts in the unit. Wrap transducers in soft cloth or foam to prevent damage. Although LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro is a compact and mobile machine, two people should move it over rough surfaces or up and down grades. 3-3-2 Adjusting System Clock Set the system clock for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro to the local time. For procedure of adjusting the system clock, refer to the section 3-6-1-1 on page 15. Fill out proper customer Information the Product Locator Installation Card. Mail this Installation Card “Product Locator” to the address corresponding to your pole. 3-3-3 Product Locator Installation Card NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card. Figure 3-7 Product Locator Installation Card Section 3-1 - Overview 3-9
[Page 64] Section 3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-4-1 Verify Customer Order Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered or damaged. 3-4-2 Physical Inspection 3-4-2-1 System Voltage Settings Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Scanner is found on a label to the right of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system. WARNING WARNING Connecting a LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro scanner to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy the scanner. 3-4-2-2 Video Formats Check that the video format for VCR playback is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL. 3-4-3 EMI Protection This Unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation. 3-10 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 65] Section 3-5 Completing the Installation 3-5-1 Power On/Boot Up NOTE: After turning off the system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Main Power Cable at the rear of the System. WARNING WARNING Protective earth must be taken when connecting AC power cable (200V) without its plug to wall outlet. 2.) Connect the Main Power cable to an appropriate mains power outlet. 3.) Switch ON the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the System. Figure 3-8 Circuit Breaker When power is applied to the Scanner, and the Rear Circuit breaker is turned ON, Power is distributed to the DC Power supply unit and power control assy in the AC power assy. When the Power ON/OFF key is pressed once, the DC power supply is enabled and feed each DC power to board assemblies. and system run the software. 4.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System once. Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation 3-11
[Page 66] 3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On (cont’d) Figure 3-9 Power On/Off Switch Location 3-5-1-2 Power Up Sequence 1.) The Start Up Screen will be shown on the Monitor display when the system is turned ON. Figure 3-10 Start Up Screen Display 2.) After initialization is complete, all lighted buttons on the Control Panel light and the default B-Mode screen or Patient screen (no probes are connected) is displayed on the monitor display. 3-12 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 67] 3-5-1-3 Power Up Sequence NOTE: To enter the Maintenance Mode, select Maintenance button. NOTE: Figure 3-11 on page 3-13 displays when Service Dongle inserted in Rear Panel. Figure 3-11 Start Application Window NOTE: Put in the service password in the Password box. 3-5-2 Power Off/ Shutdown NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 3-5-2-1 Power Shutdown 1.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System. Refer to the Figure 3-9. 2.) Click the shutdown icon in the shutdown dialog box and wait until the system shutdown. 3.) Switch OFF the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system refer to the Figure 3-8. 4.) Disconnect the Main Power Cable is necessary. For example : Relocating the scanner. Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation 3-13
[Page 68] 3-5-3 Transducer Connection 1.) Connect a transducer to one of the three rightmost transducer receptacle as follows: A.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position. B.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface. C.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to horizontal position to lock it in place. Twist the lever to the vertical position to disconnect the transducer. NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer. 3-14 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 69] Section 3-6System Configuration 3-6-1 System Specifications 3-6-1-1 System Settings Table 3-1 System Configuration Configuration Category Description Enables the user or service personnel to set the date, time, unit, language, basic information about Settings the organization such as the institution name and department. 1.) Press Insert key on the A/N keyboard to enter the utility menu. 2.) Select Utility > System>General. 3.) Set the Hospital name, Department, Date and Time, Language, and Units. Figure 3-12 Setting Display 4.) Click on Exit to terminate the utility function. Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation 3-15
[Page 70] 3-6-1-2 Physical Dimensions The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro unit are summarized in Table 3-2 on page 3-16 . The Size of LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro, with monitor and peripherals Table 3-2 Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Height Width Depth Unit 152/136 (USA) 43.0 64.0 cm 146/130 (Others) 59.8/53.5 (USA) 16.93 25.2 inches 57.5/51.2 (others) Figure 3-13 Overall Dimensions 3-16 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 71] 3-6-1-3 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals Table 3-3 Weight of LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro With Monitor and Without Other Peripherals Model Weight [kg] Weight [lbs] LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Approximately 80 Approximately 176 Pro 3-6-1-4 Acoustic Noise Output: Less than 70dB (A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2. 3-6-2 Electrical Specifications Table 3-4 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro System Voltage Current Frequency 1 110 ~ 120 VAC 5 ~ 9A 50~60Hz 2 220 ~ 240 VAC 2.5 ~ 4.5A 50~60Hz 3-6-3 On-Board Optional Peripherals Table 3-5 List of Recording Devices Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal B/W Video Printer SONY UP-D897MD N/A (* USB Interface) HS-MD3000U Video Cassette Recorder Mistubishi NTSC/PAL (USB Interface) HS-MD3000E DVD Video Recorder Panasonic LQ-MD800 NTSC/PAL (USB Interface) SONY UP-D23MD Color Video Printer N/A (* USB Interface) Mistubishi CP30DW See each option installation instructions for installation and connection procedures. NOTE: There are no external peripheral options for the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation 3-17
[Page 72] 3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel Located on the rear panel are video input and output connectors, audio input and output, USB, footswitch connector power connector and control connections for VCR or DVD Recorder, printer, and service tools. This section indicates the pin assignment for each connector. Figure 3-14 Rear Connector Panel NOTE: Each outer (case) ground line of peripheral/accessory connectors are protectively grounded. Signal ground lines are not isolated, except the Service port (3). All of signal lines (include signal GND) of the Service port are isolated. 3-18 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 73] 3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 RED 9 N/A 2 GREEN 10 SGND 3 BLUE 11 N/A 4 N/A 12 N/A 5 GND 13 HSYNC 6 RGND 14 VSYNC 7 GGND 15 N/A 8 BGND Table 3-6 Pin Assignments of DB15 connector for External VGA Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 +5 VDC 3 DATA + 2 DATA - 4 GND Table 3-7 Pin Assignments of USB Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 TX+ 5 NC 2 TX- 6 RX- 3 RX+ 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC Table 3-8 Pin Assignments of Ethernet Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation 3-19
[Page 74] 3-6-5 Video Specification Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect the VCR or DVD Video Recorder to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. Table 3-9 Video Specifications 640x480 800x600 800x600 1024x768 Timing Parameter NTSC PAL 60Hz 60Hz 75Hz 60Hz Horizontal Rate [kHz] 60.02 31.25 31.47 37.88 46.88 48.36 Horizontal Period [μ s] 16.66 32.00 31.78 26.40 21.33 20.68 Pixel Clock [MHz] 78.75 29.50 24.55 40.00 49.50 65.00 H Blank Width [μ s ] 3.66 5.97 5.70 6.40 5.17 4.92 H Sync Width [μ s ] 1.22 2.34 2.36 3.20 1.62 2.09 H Front Porch [μ s ] 0.20 0.75 0.73 1.00 0.32 0.37 Active Horizontal Period [μ s ] 13.00 26.03 26.07 20.00 16.16 15.75 Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.03 50.00 59.94 60.32 75.00 60.00 Vertical Period [ms] 13.33 20.00 16.68 16.58 13.33 16.67 V Sync Width [lines=ms] 32=0.53 49=1.57 45=1.43 28=0.74 25=0.53 38=0.79 V Front Porch [ lines= μ s ] 3=50.00 5=160.00 6=190.70 4=105.60 3=64.00 6=124.10 Equalization Gate [ lines= μ s ] 1=16.66 5=160.0 6=190.7 1=26.4 1=21.3 3=62.00 Lines: Field/Frame 800 625/625 525/525 628 625 806 Active Lines/Frame 768 576 480 600 600 768 3-20 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 75] 3-6-6 Setting VCR (Mitsubishi MD3000) USB Interface 1.) Turn off the Power of the VCR. 2.) Open the rear panel of the VCR. 3.) Set dip switches. Off 1~6 pins, On 7 pin, and Off 8 pin. NOTE: 7 Pin ON = USB Interface, OFF = RS232C Interface. Figure 3-15 Setting VCR USB Interface Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation 3-21
[Page 76] Section 3-7 Available Probes See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro User Manual for probes and intended use. See Chapter 9 , for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes. Section 3-8 Software/Option Configuration Refer to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date Format. For information on configuring Software Options, refer to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, refer to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. 3-22 Section 3-8 - Software/Option Configuration
[Page 77] Section 3-9 Connectivity Installation Worksheet Site System Information Floor: Comments: Site: Dept: Room: LOGIQ SN: Type: REV: CONTACT INFORMATION Name Title Phone E-Mail Address TCP/IP Settings Name - AE Title: IP Settings Remote Archive Setup IP Address: Remote Archive IP: Subnet Mask: Remote Archive Name: Default Gateway: Services (Destination Devices) Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title Section 3-8 - Software/Option Configuration 3-23
[Page 78] Section 3-10 Insite IP Address Configuration This information needed to facilitate the OnLine Center engineers in connecting to the system is found in the InSite Installation Manual. Section 3-11 Loading Base System Software 3-11-1 Loading Base system Software For more information on loading base system software, refer to the Chapter 8. Section 3-12 Warnings 3-12-1 Warnings 3-12-1-1 USB HDD Only 1.8 inch USB HDDs are recommended for the system. Other types are not guaranteed to be compatible with the system. 3-12-1-2 Starting Echoloader in Maintenance mode If Echoloader never started once, starting Echoloader in the maintenance mode will not work. In other words, in order to be able to start Echoloader in maintenace mode, Echoloader should have been started at least once. 3-24 Section 3-11 - Loading Base System Software
[Page 79] Section 3-13 Paperwork NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete system. 3-13-1 Product Locator Installation NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card. Figure 3-16 Product Locator Installation Card 3-13-2 User Manual(s) Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability. 3-13-2-1 Reference off-board peripherals and options None. Section 3-12 - Warnings 3-25
[Page 80] This page was intentionally left blank. 3-26 Section 3-12 - Warnings
[Page 81] Chapter 4 Functional Checks Section 4-1 Overview 4-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 4 This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. Table 4-1 Contents in Chapter 4 Section Description Page Number 4-1 Overview 4-1 4-2 Required Equipment 4-1 4-3 General Procedure 4-2 4-4 Software Configuration Checks 4-20 4-5 Peripheral Checks 4-21 4-6 Monitor Function Checks 4-22 4-7 Keyboard Function Checks 4-24 4-8 Mechanical Function Checks 4-29 4-9 Board Function Checks 4-35 4-10 Site Log 4-48 Section 4-2 Required Equipment • An empty (blank) DVD-R or CD-R Disk. • At least one transducer. (normally you should check all the transducers used on the systsem) Section 4-1 - Overview 4 - 1
[Page 82] Section 4-3 General Procedure CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes. NOTICE Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable on the system. TAG LOCKOUT Signed Date 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up NOTE: After turning off the system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Main Power cable to an appropriate mains power outlet. 2.) Switch ON the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the System. Figure 4-1 Circuit Breaker When power is applied to the Scanner, and the Rear Circuit breaker is turned ON, Power is distributed to the DC Power supply unit and power control assy in the AC power assy. When the Power ON/OFF key is pressed once, the DC power supply is enabled and feed each DC power to board assemblies. and system run the software 4 - 2 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 83] 4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On (cont’d) 3.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System once. Figure 4-2 Power On/Off Standby Switch Location 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 4-3-2-1 Scanner Shutdown 1.) Press the On/Off Key at the front of the System once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. Figure 4-3 System Exit Menu for Power Down Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 3
[Page 84] 4-3-2-2 Switch off the System 1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the scanner. 2.) Unplug the power cord if necessary. For example : Servicing or relocating the scanner. 4-3-3 System Features 4-3-3-1 Control Panel for LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Figure 4-4 Control Panel Tour LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro 1.) Power ON/OFFf switch 2.) Patient Key 3.) Alpha Numeric key 4.) TGC 5.) Track Ball 6.) Naviagtion key 7.) User Define Key 8.) Function Select key 9.) Gain Knob 10.)Freeze Key 4 - 4 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 85] 4-3-3-2 Monitor Display for LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro 1 2 3 12 5 13 19 20 21 Figure 4-5 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Monitor Display Tour 1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, 13. Imaging Parameters by Mode. Operator Identification. 14. Focal Zone Indicator. 2. Patient Name, Patient Identification. 15. TGC. 3. Power Output Readout 16. Body Pattern. 4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker. 17. Depth Scale. 5. Image Preview. 18. Top Menu 6. Gray/Color Bar. 19. Caps Lock: Lit when On. 7. Cine Gauge. 20. Service Interface icon (wrench), iLinq 8. Measurement Summary Window. icon, and system messages display 9. Image. (not shown on image) 10. Measurement Calipers. 21. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, 11. Measurement Results Window. M&A (Measurement and Analysis), 12. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset. Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt. 22. Sub Menu Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 5
[Page 86] 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode , M-Mode , Color Flow , and Doppler . Table 4-2 B/M-Mode Functions Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam Power Output (Acoustic Power) intensity. 2% increments between 0-100%. Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to Dynamic Range shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast. Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific Focus Number and Position area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image. Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an Rejection echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed). Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences Edge Enhance corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only. Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the Frame Average effect of presenting a smoother, softer image. Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect Colorize a Gray Map. Determines how the echo intensity levels received are Gray Map presented as shades of gray. Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu. Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to the probe's next Frequency lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency. Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best Frame Rate/Resolution possible image. Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative B Flow hemodynamics in vascular structures. Sensitivity/PRI Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal. Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background On/Off Background Off lets you view just flow information. Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept. 4 - 6 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 87] 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks Table 4-3 CFM and PWD Functions Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood Baseline flows to eliminate aliasing. Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, PRF/Wall Filter the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display. Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Angle Correct Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured Threshold assigns the gray scale level at which color Threshold information stops. Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has Map been made, the color bar displays the resultant map. Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. Invert red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted. Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow Packet Size vector. Quick Angle Correct Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under. In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives Doppler Display Formats defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or time-motion with B-Mode reference. In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority or equal priority. Sample Volume Gate Length Sizes the sample volume gate Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get Scan Area more information without moving the probe Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 7
[Page 88] 4-3-6 Basic Measurements NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze . 4-3-6-1 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements 1.) Press MEASURE once an active caliper displays. 2.) To position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL . 3.) To fix the start point, press Set . The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL . 5.) To complete the measurement, press SET . The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE . To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press CLEAR once. NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn CURSOR SELECT . NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered onto worksheets, press CLEAR . 4-3-6-2 Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement 1.) Press MEASURE once; an active caliper displays. 2.) To position the active caliper, move the TRACKBALL . 3.) To fix the start point, press SET . The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL . 5.) Turn the ELLIPSE control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears. NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern. 6.) To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (move the calipers), move the TRACKBALL . 7.) To increase the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a counterclockwise direction. 8.) To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE . 9.) To complete the measurement, press SET . The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: - To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press CLEAR once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement. - To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press CLEAR a second time. 4 - 8 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 89] 4-3-6-3 Worksheets Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. 4-3-7 Probe/Connectors Usage 4-3-7-1 Connecting a probe 1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case. 2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable. 3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage. 4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise. 5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. 6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector. 7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not resting on the floor. 4-3-7-2 Activating the probe Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the monitor screen. The probe selection scrren will be come up when the application key is enabled. The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically. 4-3-7-3 Deactivating the probe When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode. 1.) Press the Freeze key. 2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for complete probe cleaning instructions.) 3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder. 4-3-7-4 Disconnecting the probe Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe. 1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port. 2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free. 3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box. Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 9
[Page 90] 4-3-8 Using Cine 4-3-8-1 Activating CINE Press FREEZE , then roll the TRACKBALL to activate CINE. To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/ Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback. press Run/Stop. 4-3-8-2 Quickly Move to Start/End Frame Press FIRST to move to the first CINE frame; press LAST to move to the last CINE frame. 4-3-8-3 Start Frame/End Frame Turn the START FRAME dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop. Turn the END FRAME dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop. 4-3-8-4 Adjusting the CINE Loop Playback Speed Turn the LOOP SPEED dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed. 4-3-8-5 Disconnecting B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select B ONLY. To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select TL ONLY. To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select B/TL. 4-3-8-6 Moving through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame Turn FRAME BY FRAME to move through CINE memory one frame at a time. 4-3-9 Image Management (QG) For Image Management functionality refer to the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Quick Guide. It talks about several topics: • Clipboard • Printing Images • Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image • Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation • Starting an Exam • Configuring Connectivity • TCP/IP • Services (Destinations) • Buttons • Views Verifying and Pinging a Device 4 - 10 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 91] 4-3-10 Using the DVD-R 4-3-10-1 Using the DVD-R NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the DVD-R because the drive actuator will not be locked and the DVD-R could break. 1.) Go to the Utility->Connectivity->Removable Media. 2.) Insert CD/DVD media. 3.) Press Verify 4.) The properties will be like below. a.) Capacity, Free space depends on media type. b.) Formatted / Finalized : No Figure 4-6 Removable Media 5.) Go to Patient. 6.) Press Data Transfer (located at the upper-left side of Patient screen) 7.) Select Export task. Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 11
[Page 92] 8.) Select the type of Removable CD/DVD on the [To] combo box. 9.) It will do auto-formatting. Figure 4-7 Formatting 10.)After auto-formatting, select some patients on the upper list area and then press the [Transfer] button. 11.)it will do transferring to CD/DVD. Figure 4-8 Transferring 4 - 12 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 93] 12.)The selected data is transferred correctly. Figure 4-9 Transfer 13.)Press F3 and select the [Yes and Verify files]. 14.)It will do finalizing. Figure 4-10 Finalzing Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 13
[Page 94] 15.)It will do Verifying. Figure 4-11 Verifying 16.)It will eject the CD/DVD and Go to Utility and reinsert the CD/DVD. 17.)Go to Utility->Connectivity->Removable Media. Figure 4-12 Removable Media 18.)Press Verify 19.)The properties will be like below. a.) Capacity is the size of transferred data. b.) Free space is 0. c.) Formatted / Database Present / Finalized : Yes (DICOMDIR Present : depends on setting) NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other methods. 4 - 14 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 95] 4-3-11 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images NOTE: When upgrading from R1.0.X to R2.0.X, preset cannot be transferred. 4-3-11-1 Formatting Media 1.) To format the backup media, CD-R or DVD-R, select the UTILITY key on the Front Panel. 2.) Select CONNECTIVITY, then RERNOVABLE MEDIA. Properly label and Insert the backup media. 3.) Select the media type from the drop down menu. 4.) Enter the label for the media as shown in Figure 4-13. It is best to use all capital letters with no spaces or punctuation marks. Media Verify Format Selection Format Media Label Figure 4-13 Format and Verify Media 5.) The Ultrasound system displays a pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 4-14. When the formatting has been completed, press OK to continue. 6.) If desired, verify that the format was successful by returning to Utility>Connectivity>Rernovable Media and selecting VERIFY as shown in Figure 4-11. Figure 4-14 Format Successful Pop-up Menu Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 15
[Page 96] 4-3-11-2 Backup System Presets and Configurations NOTE: Always backup any preset configurations before a software reload. This ensures that if the presets need to be reloaded, after the software update, they will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service. 1.) Insert a formatted CD-R or DVD-R into the drive. 2.) Press UTILITY key 3.) Select SYSTEM. on the monitor screen 4.) On the monitor display, select BACKUP/RESTORE. 5.) In the Backup list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration and User Defined Configuration. 6.) In the Media field, select DVD-R. 7.) Select BACKUP. The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen. Check here to backup presets and configurations Figure 4-15 Backup/Restore Menu 4 - 16 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 97] 4-3-11-3 Restore System Presets and Configurations The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard drive. Make sure to insert the correct CD-R or DVD-R. 1.) Insert the Backup/Restore CD-R or DVD-R into the drive. 2.) Press the UTILITY. key 3.) Select SYSTEM.menu on the monitor screen 4.) On the monitor display, select BACKUP/RESTORE. 5.) In the Restore list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration and User Defined Configuration. 6.) In the Media field, select the Backup/Restore DVD-R. 7.) Select RESTORE. d.) The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen. Figure 4-16 Backup/Restore Menu Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 17
[Page 98] 4-3-11-4 Archiving Images To export an exam(s) to a compatible Ultrasound system: 1.) Format the removable media (CD-ROM/DVD-R). Label the removable media. Answer Yes/OK to the messages.Press Patient. Deselect any selected patient(s) in the search portion of the Patient screen. Press Exam Data Transfer (located at the upper, left-hand corner of the Patient menu). Figure 4-17 Exam Data Transfer 2.) Select Export task Button. Figure 4-18 Task button 3.) The [From] combo box is not active. It displays Local Archive. The [To] combo box is active. Select the type of removable media CD R/DVD-R. Then please wait until the patient list is visible. Figure 4-19 To Combo Box 4 - 18 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 99] 4-3-11-4 Archiving Images (cont’d) 4.) In the patient list at the top of the Patient menu, select the patient(s) you want to export. You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient. To select a consecutive list of patients, click the cursor on the first name, move the cursor to the last name, then press and hold down the Shift+right Set key to select all the names. To select a non-consecutive list of patients, click the cursor at the first name, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key again, etc. You can also search for patients via the Search key and string. Or, Select All Button from the Patient Menu: Figure 4-20 Source Section NOTE: You need to use your best judgment when moving patients' images. If there are lots of images or loops, then only move a few patients at a time. 5.) Once you have selected all of the patients to export, press Transfer Button as shown in Figure 4-17 from the Patient Menu. 6.) The progress bar appears as the copy is taking place. Once transfer completed, the exported patient list will be shown as Figure 4-21. Figure 4-21 Destination Section of Patient Screen 7.) Press F3 to eject the media. Specify that you want to finalize the CD-ROM. Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4 - 19
[Page 100] 4-3-12 ECG Check Out Connect the ECG Harness and check: Table 4-4 ECG Harness Check Step Task to do Expected Result(s) Connect the ECG at the Connector on the Front of the It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the image 1. scanner. sector Section 4-4 Software Configuration Checks Table 4-5 Software Configuration Checks Step Task to do Expected Result(s) 1. Check Date and Time setting Date and Time are correct 2. Check that Location (Hospital Name) is correct Location Name is correct 3. Check Language settings Desired Language is displayed 4. Print1, 2 Keys and User define Keys are assigned as Check assignment of Printer Keys and User Define Keys desired by the customer 5. Check that all of the customer’s options are set up correct All authorized functions are enabled 4 - 20 Section 4-4 - Software Configuration Checks
[Page 101] Section 4-5Peripheral Checks Check that peripherals work as described below: Table 4-6 Peripheral Checks Step Task to do Expected Result(s) 1. Press ( FREEZE ) To stop image acquisition. The image displayed on the screen is printed on B&W or Color printer, 2. Press ( P1 ) or ( P2 ) on the Keyboard depending on the key assignment configuration 3. Press RECORD on the Keyboard. To start the video counter at a different point: 4. Press COUNTER RESET on the screen. To reset the counter 5. Press SEARCH on the screen. The Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window is displayed 6. Enter the counter number in the counter field Number appears 7. Press SET COUNTER to save the change. Number is saved Press SEARCH COUNTER to search the 8. To search VCR tapes exam by counter value. counter. To Start Recording 9. Press REC icon on the screen A red dot is displayed in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun 10.. Press VIDEO SOURCE on the screen. To return to the scanning mode To Stop recording 11.. Press STOP icon on the screen The video status icon is changed to (Stop) 12. Press PLAY icon on the screen. To play back the tape to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind Use the Assignable keys on the Control 13.. or fast forward. Panel The video status icon in updated accordingly. While in playback mode, use the SEARCH 14. SPEED to adjust the video playback speed To search on the tape and scroll through the record. 15. Press MIC ON/OFF to turn the microphone on/off Section 4-4 - Software Configuration Checks 4 - 21
[Page 102] Section 4-6Monitor Function Checks 4-6-1 17" LCDMON II Assy & LCD Panel with filter Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. 2.) Select "Utility Key" on the Key board and then choose "Test Pattern" and "Resolution" marked below in the figure below.. Figure 4-22 17” LCDMON II Assy Function Check 3.) All the Numbers from 0 to 100 on the figure above should be easily distinguished. 4 - 22 Section 4-4 - Software Configuration Checks
[Page 103] 4-6-2 17" OSD Key Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. 2.) Select "OSD Button " marked below in the figure below. OSD button for menu display Figure 4-23 3.) OSD Menu should be displayed within 5sec. 4.) Select "OSD Button " marked below in the figure below and check contrast value is changed as soon as the button pushed. OSD button for adjusting values Figure 4-24 5.) Displayed value should be changed as soon as the button pushed. Section 4-4 - Software Configuration Checks 4 - 23
[Page 104] Section 4-7Keyboard Function Checks 4-7-1 Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Boot up the system. 2.) Insert the Service Dongle and go to the maintenance mode. 3.) Click 'Start' and go to 'Run'. Figure 4-25 start and run 4.) Click the Run and then you can get the 'Run' dialog box. 5.) Write the 'cmd 'command into 'Run' dialog box and press 'OK' button to display command prompt. Figure 4-26 Run dialog box Figure 4-27 command prompt 4 - 24 Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks
[Page 105] 4-7-1 Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure (cont’d) 6.) Write the 'scfpapitest.exe' on the command prompt and press 'Enter' button to pop up the scfpapitest program. Figure 4-28 scfpapitest program 7.) Press the keyboard button and rotate rotary button. When you press or rotary keys, Log dialog box displays the key log. Button name and displaying log name is like the table. Table 4-7 Button and Rotaty Table Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log Patient New Patient Button Active Mode Active Mode Button Probe/Preset Probe Button CF CFM PushEncoder Button Report Report Button PDI PDI Button End Exam End Exam Button Dept (Button) Depth PushEncoder Button Record Record button Dept (Rotary) Depth PushEncoder Rotary P1 Print or record button1 PW PWD PushEncoder Button P2 Print or record button2 CW CW Button Reverse Reverse Button M M Mode PushEncoder Userdefine 1 Userdefine 1 Button Scan Area ScanArea Button Userdefine 2 Userdefine 2 Button M/D Cursor MD Cursor Button Userdefine 3 Userdefine 3 Button Zoom (Button) Zoom/Size PushEncoder Button Userdefine 4 Userdefine 4 Button Zoom (Rotary) Zoom/Size PushEncoder Rotary Userdefine 5 Userdefine 5 Button Measure Measure Button BodyPattern/Ellipse PushEncoder L (Left) Left Button BodyPattern/Ellipse (Button) Button Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks 4 - 25
[Page 106] Table 4-7 Button and Rotaty Table Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log BodyPattern/Ellipse PushEncoder R (Right) Right Button BodyPattern/Ellipse (Rotary Rotary THI Harmonics Button Comment comment Button AO Auto Right Button Clear Clear Button B (Button) B PushEncoder Button TGC Slide Slider : n=8 s1 ~ s8 B (Rotary) B PushEncoder Rotary NOTICE When you can check the name displayed in log as you press or rotate keys, the main keyboard assy was replaced correctly. 8.) Check the 'Fast' radio button into Indicator box on scfpapitest program and press 'Set All' button. Figure 4-29 Fast button NOTICE After pressing Fast radio button, indicators should be blanked on the frontpanel. 4 - 26 Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks
[Page 107] 4-7-2 Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Boot up the system and run the scfpapitest program. NOTICE Follow up the procedure 4-7-1 "Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-24 to run the scfpapitest program. 2.) Press and Rotary sub keyboard, and Paddle(up/down, right/left) button. 3.) Check the log dialog box in scfpapitest program Table 4-8 Button and Rotary Table Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log 1 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 1 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 2 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 2 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 3 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 3 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 4 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 4 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 5 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 5 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary Up Paddle Up Button Down Paddle Down Button Left Paddle Left Button Right Paddle Right Button 4-7-3 Trackball Assy validation 1.) Boot up the system. 2.) Press the measurement button. 3.) Move the Trackball. When you move the trackball in measurement mode, the cursor should be moved. 4-7-4 A/N Key assy validation 1.) Boot up the system. 2.) Press 'Comment' button. 3.) Press A/N keyboard. Each key should be displayed on the monitor display. 4-7-5 Freeze key validation 1.) Follow up the procedure 4-7-1 "Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-24 to run the scfpapitest program. 2.) Press Freeze button and check up the Log dialog box if the freeze key was release. NOTICE After pressing Freeze button, Freeze button message should be displayed into Log dialogbox on scfpapitest program. Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks 4 - 27
[Page 108] 4-7-6 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set validation 1.) Follow up the procedure 4-7-1 "Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-24 to run the scfpapitest program. 2.) Slide TGC pot and check up the value. NOTICE While sliding TGC pot, TGC message should be displayed. 4-7-7 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set validation Follow up 4-7-2 "Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-27. 4 - 28 Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks
[Page 109] Section 4-8Mechanical Function Checks 4-8-1 Cover Parts Function Validation Table 4-9 Cover parts of the FRU No Item 1 Right and Left cover 2 Front cover 3 Monitor Cover set 4 Rear cover 5 Middle cover 6 Top cover 7 Top bottom cover 8 Pole cover 9 Neck front cover 10 Neck rear cover 11 Dummy cover L/R 12 New articulation cover set 13 EMI cover L/R 14 Rear handle 15 Rear hook 16 ECG cable hook 17 Probe Holder 18 Front Dummy cover • Check if the FRU parts are assembled tightly by naked eye and hands. • Check if there are dents, scratches, or cracks on the FRU parts. • Check if screws are in place. Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks 4 - 29
[Page 110] 4-8-2 Air filter set Function Validation Procedure Check if the air filter is placed deep inside. Figure 4-30 Air Filter Set 4 - 30 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 111] 4-8-3 TGC key assy/TGC Knob set, Sub keyboard encoder Knob Set, keycap set, Main keyboard Encoder Knob set Function Validation Procedure • Check if the each button operates properly. • Check if encoder knobs are in the center. • Check if the keycap set can not be removed easily. Figure 4-31 Keycap set, Main keyboard encoder knob set Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks 4 - 31
[Page 112] 4-8-4 Cup holder Function Validation Procedure Check if the cup holder can not be removed easily. Figure 4-32 Cup Holder 4 - 32 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 113] 4-8-5 Front caster/Rear caster Function Validation Procedure • In case of Bi break caster, check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation. • In case of front caster, check caster locks for proper operation. • In case of rear caster, check caster's motion for proper operation. • Check if screws are in place. Figure 4-33 Front caster/Rear caster Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks 4 - 33
[Page 114] 4-8-6 New articulation arm with cover Function Validation Procedure • Check if the lock operates properly. • Check if the swivel motion operates properly. • Check if the up and down motion operates properly. Figure 4-34 4 - 34 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 115] Section 4-9Board Function Checks 4-9-1 PI128II Assy function check procedure WARNING WARNING When Service Login for FRU Diagnostic, scan mode must be B-mode. After Diagnostic is completed, the system should be rebooted WARNING WARNING Diagnostics should be performed with probes which have 128 or more elements 1.) Turn on the system. 2.) After completion of echoloader loading, connect probe on port 1. Refer to the 4-3-7-1 "Connecting a probe" on page 4-9. 3.) Log into "Service Login". Refer to the 5-7-2 "Global Service User Interface (GSUI)" on page 5-24. 4.) Click "Diagnostics" on top menu. 5.) On left folder window, select 'LOGIQ P6 Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'PI128 II'. 6.) Select 'PI128 II Overall' and execute test. 7.) All diagnostic test items shall be passed. Refer to the figure below. NOTE: For LP6 PRO, select 'LOGIQ P6 PRO Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'P3RLY' and execute test. Figure 4-35 PI128II diagnostic test 8.) Shut down the system. 9.) Restart the system Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 35
[Page 116] 10.)Activate probe. Refer to the 4-3-7-2 "Activating the probe" on page 4-9. 11.)Check the system basic functions. Refer to the 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" and refer to the 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-7. 12.)Disconnect probe. Refer to the 4-3-7-4 "Disconnecting the probe" on page 4-9. 13.)Connect probe on port 2 and repeat step 8) ~ 10). 14.)Connect probe on port 3 and repeat step 8) ~ 10). 15.)All basic functions must show correct operation as described. 4 - 36 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 117] 4-9-2 DTRX64II Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system and check the completion of Echoloader loading. 3.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P6 Diagnostics' => 'FRU Test' => 'DTRX64II overall'. 5.) All diagnostic test item of DTRX64II should be passed. Figure 4-36 DTRX64II Diagnostic test 8.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to the 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 37
[Page 118] 4-9-3 CWD64 Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Insert the Sector probe in probe port. 2.) Turn on the system. 3.) Press Virtual Convex button to enable Virtual Convex if not already enabled. Figure 4-37 Vitrual Convex Enabled Figure 4-38 Virtual Convex 4 - 38 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 119] 4.) Press “CW” button to start CWD Mode. Figure 4-39 CW mode 5.) Scan in CWD mode (with Virtual Convex enabled). 6.) Press “B” button to scan in “B” mode. 7.) Press Virtual Convex button to disable Virtual Convex if not already disabled. Figure 4-40 Virtual Convex Disabled. 8.) Press “CW” button to start CWD Mode. 9.) Scan in CWD mode (with Virtual Convex disabled) 10.)Compare the CWD (with Virtual Convex enabled) sensitivity and CWD (with Virtual Convex disabled). 11.)Pass if two modes have the same sensitivity. 12.)Do the service login. Refer to the 5-7-3-2 " Service login" on page 5-28 13.)Select "Diagnostics" => "LOGIQ P6 Diagnostics" => "FRU Test" => "CWD64" => "CWD64 Overall" NOTE: For LP6 PRO, select 'LOGIQ P6 PRO Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'ACWD' => "ACWD Overall" 14.)After All diagnostic function check of CWD64 should be Passed.Refer to the Table 7-5, “FRU Test, Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 39
[Page 120] CWD64 Diagnostics Menu,” on page 22. Figure 4-41 CWD64 Diagnostic Test 15.)Reboot up the system. 16.)Insert Probe in Probe port (Sector or Pencil Probe). 17.)After system boot up, enter the CWD mode. 18.)check the display Image. Refer to the 10-5-2-1 "System Checks" on page 10-8 and 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-7. 4 - 40 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 121] 4-9-4 SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Procedure 4-9-4-1 L2SYSCON diagnostic Test 1.) Turn on the system and check the completion of echoloader loading. 3.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P6 Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'L2SYSCON' => 'L2SYSCON Overall'. 5.) All diagnostic test item of L2SYSCON should be passed. Figure 4-42 L2SYSCON Diagnostic Test 8.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to the 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode 4-9-4-2 Peripheral Test Refer to the Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-21. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 41
[Page 122] 4-9-5 APS II Assy PCB Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. 3.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P6 Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'APS II' => 'APS II Overall'. 5.) All diagnostic test item of APS II should be passed. Figure 4-43 APS II Diagnostic Test 4 - 42 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 123] 4-9-6 SOM Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. 2.) Press the 'del' key in A/N key within 3 sec. to enter BIOS setting mode. 3.) Set the system time and the system Date. 4.) Check the SOM version (HW version & BIOS version) 3.) 4.) BIOS version 4.)HW version Figure 4-44 Check the SOM version (HW version & BIOS version) 5.) Press the 'F10' key to save configuration changes and exit bios mode. The system will restart. 6.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to the 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode 4-9-7 RFC Assy Function Validation Procedure 2.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to the 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-6 and refer to the 10-5-2-1 "System Checks" on page 10-8. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 43
[Page 124] 4-9-8 BP128 Assy Function Validation Procedure 2.) All of attached ASSY should be tested. 3.) Refer to the 4-9-4 "SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-41. 4.) Refer to the 4-9-6 "SOM Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-43. 5.) Refer to the 4-9-2 "DTRX64II Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-37. 6.) Refer to the 4-9-1 "PI128II Assy function check procedure" on page 4-35. 7.) Refer to the 4-9-5 "APS II Assy PCB Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-42. 8.) Refer to the 4-9-3 "CWD64 Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-38.(Optional) 4 - 44 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 125] 4-9-9 Nest fan Function Validation Procedure 1.) After replace Nest fan assy, turn on the system. Refer to the 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3- 11. 2.) Confirm the fan rotating with naked eye and check the fan operating by rotating sound. No strange sound should be heard. Figure 4-45 Checking Nest fan rotating NOTE: Do not close the right EMI bracket and right plastic cover before check the fan operation. 4-9-10 Transbox/ Fan Function Validation Procedure 1.) After replace Transbox fan assy, turn on the system. Refer to the 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11. 2.) Confirm the fan rotating by feeling wind. Refer to the figure below. Figure 4-46 Checking Transbox fan rotating NOTE: Remove right side dusty filter and check the fan operation. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 45
[Page 126] 4-9-11 DTRX Cooler with heatsink Function Validation Procedure 2.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to the 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Refer to the 10-5-2-1 "System Checks" on page 10-8. 4-9-12 ACPC II Assy set Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to the 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 sequence to check AP950 Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2.) Check the peripheral operation. Refer to the Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-21. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4 - 46 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 127] 4-9-13 AP950 Transbox Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to the 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 for power up sequence to check AP950 Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2.) Check the peripheral operation. Refer to the Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-21 to confirm the peripheral operation. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4-9-14 Fuse set Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to the 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 sequence to check AP950 Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2.) Check the peripheral operation. Refer to the Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-21. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4-9-15 ARPII Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) ARPII Assy function can be validated by the result of 'Peripheral Test'. Once ARii Assy is replaced, do peripheral test in order to confirm the successful installation. Refer to the Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-21. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 47
[Page 128] Section 4-10Site Log Table 4-10 Site Log Date Service person Problem Comments 4 - 48 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 129] This page was intentionally left blank. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4 - 49
[Page 130] 4 - 50 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 131] Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Section 5-1 Overview This chapter explains LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes. Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5 Section Description Page Number 5-1 Overview 5-1 5-2 Block Diagrams and Theory 5-2 5-3 Power Diagrams 5-9 5-4 Top Console 5-13 5-5 P6 ARP II (Rear Panel) 5-17 5-6 Cable Connection 5-19 5-7 Service Platform 5-23 5-8 RFS (Service For Request) 5-35 5-9 Machine RFS 5-40 5-10 Fast Polling 5-43 Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 1
[Page 132] Section 5-2 Block Diagrams and Theory 5-2-1 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Block Diagram Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ P6 System Block Diagram, 128CH 5 - 2 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 133] Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ P6 Front End Block Diagram Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 3
[Page 134] Figure 5-3 LOGIQ™ P6 Backend Block Diagram 5 - 4 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 135] Figure 5-4 Others Block Diagram (cont’d) Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 5
[Page 136] Figure 5-5 LOGIQ™ P6Pro System Block Diagram, 64CH 5 - 6 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 137] Figure 5-6 P6PRO Front End Block Diagram Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 7
[Page 138] Figure 5-7 P6PRO Backend Block Diagram 5 - 8 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 139] Section 5-3 Power Diagrams 5-3-1 Overview The main function of the AC Power assy is to supply powers the various internal subsystems, and to isolate the scanner electrically from the on site Mains Power System. The voltage to peripherals can be confederated to either 110 VAC or 220 VAC. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limitter board (ACPC II assy) has been included in this box. Internal circuits are seperated as: 100~127VAC, 200~240VAC, and 100VAC~120VAC for peripheral and 200V ~ 240V for system. 5-3-2 TRANSBOX(AC Power, AP950) RELAY RELAY & & Protect Protect circuit circuit NTC / PTC NTC / PTC BYPASS BYPASS ` ` Figure 5-8 AC Power Assy Block Diagram The main cord has plugs in one side end. A male plug connects to the mains outlet on site. The mains voltage is routed to the Main Circuit Breaker, located on the rear side of the system. The Main Circuit Breaker is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power. From the Main Circuit Breaker, the AC power is routed via the Mains Transformer and the Inrush Current Limiter to internal outlet connector for AC distribution. The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains. Input voltage to the transformer can be either 220 VAC or 110 VAC. AC power for APS II is being supplied from transformer through Inrush Current Limiter without additional control. Other AC powers for LCDMON, 4D BOX(option), and peripheral are being supplied form transfomer by On/Off control. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 9
[Page 140] 5-3-3 APS II (LV Power & HV Power) APS II supplys all DC power sources which are for all PWA assy in nest box, nest FANs and trans FAN. To turn on the APS II, the live power is needed as a standby power. This live power is generated from APS II when the APS II receive the AC input from the AP950(TRANSBOX). When the LP(live power) is supplied to the SYSCONML and system momentary switch is ON, SYSCONML make the LV_ON signal level into low to turn on the APS II. After turning on the APS II, the ACPC II in AP950 assy change the relay path on itself to supply stable AC powers to LCD monitor, 4D Box or Peripherals by using of D12V from APS II. DC Output Capacity: • +D2V : 10.0 A rms • +D5VLP: 0.42 A rms • +D5V: 4.96 A rms • +D3.3V: 10.0 A rms • +D12V: 1.0 A rms • +D12VFAN: 1.03 A rms • +A6V: 9.0 A rms • -A6V: 2.0 A rms • +A12V: 3.25 A rms • -A12V: 1.5 A rms APS II supplies High Voltage power to activate high voltage transmit pulse and static supply bias voltage on high voltage mux and probe. When SYSCONML makes the HV_STOP signal to low, the APS II generates the HV module in APS II. The SHV supplies +/-80V to the system constantly and the THVH and THVL supplies 0~+/- 60V individually. SYSCONML controls the level of THVH and THVL through the IIC interface. It depends on probe or applications HV Output Capacity: • +SHV, +80V: 0.05A rms • - SHV, -80V: 0.05A rms • +THVH, 0V~+60V: 0.67A rms • - THVH, -60V~0V, 0.67A rms • +THVL, 0V~+60V, 0.75A rms • - THVL, -60V~0V, 0.75A rms 5 - 10 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 141] 5-3-4 AC Power Outlet for Peripheral The LP6 ARP II 110V Assy and LP6 ARP II 220V Assy supply the AC power to peripherals. Both of the assemblies are the same except the circuit breaker's current ratings depending on voltage of the system power source (See 'Safety' described below). 5-3-4-1 Safety • Circuit Breaker Table 5-2 Circuit Breaker Specification Power Voltage Peripheral Current Assembly Trip Time Reset Time Rating (V) Rating (A) LP6 ARP II 1 hour max. @ 110 4.0 110 second (110V) 5.4A, 25 degreeC LP6 ARP II 1hour max. @ 220 2.0 180 second (220V) 3.5A, 25 degreeC • Electrical Isolation The LP6 ARP assy are isolated electrically from the internal circuit of the system. The dielectric strength of the isolator should be 500VAC RMS or higher within 1 minute (in compliance with IEC60601-1-1). 5-3-5 Front End The Front End generates the strong burst transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to an digital signal. The digital representation of this signal is presented to the Mid Processor section. • PI128II (Relay) : PI128II Assy contains 3 connectors for probe interfacing, and selects one probe among connected probes. In case of LOGIQP6 PRO, P3RLY Assy is install for probe interfacing. • DTRX64II: Cascading 2 transmitting and receiving beam formers (2 DTRX64s) allows the system to transmit with Higle level or low level pulses, and to sum delayed echos for 128 channels. In case of LOGIQP6 PRO, 1 pcs of DTRX64II Assy is installed. • SYSCONML (System Control board with Multi-Line mid processor): It includes 4 main functions: front-end control, mid-processing for MLA2, post processing for display and user interface control. • APS II(Power Supply): Includes Low voltage powers and High voltage powers in one module. It generates 2.0V, 3.3V, 5V, and 12V for digital parts and +/-6V, +/-12V for analog parts. Additionally, It generates THV+/-/TLV+/-(Transmit High Voltage/Transmit Low Voltage) for transmit driver and SHV+/-(Scanner High Voltage) for High voltage MUX embeded in probe side. • RFC(RF signal Connection): Connects PI128II, DTRX64II and CWD64 Assys for 128 transmitting and receiving signals. In case of LOGIQP6 PRO, RFC PRO Assy is installed. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 11
[Page 142] 5-3-6 SYSCONML Figure 5-9 SYSCONML Block Diagram This block has 4 main functions: front-end control, mid-processing for MLA2, post processing for display and user interface control. • Front-end Control: This is to control the front beamfomer assys. This includes as: Probe interface, assy version reading interface, scan control for transmit/receiving beamforming. • Mid-processing: Basically this procesing is to decode the encoded receiving siganls, demodulate the echo signals with carrier, compensate the frequency and gain based on time, and compress the enveloped detected signals logorithmically for display. This processing is executed by 2 CHACOMs. • Post Processing, and User Interface: SYSCONML Assy has high performance SOM (system on module) which performs post processing for 2D image, Color flow and Doppler with mid-processed data, and handless user inputs through operation console. 5 - 12 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 143] Section 5-4 Top Console 5-4-1 Keyboard Figure 5-10 Keyboard Block Diagram LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Keyboard assy consists of 2 sub assys, one is main keyboard assy and the other is sub keyboard assy. • Main keyboard Assy: has an Alpha Numeric keys, Trackball, Encoders, TGC controller, and other US dedicated keys and lighting components. • Sub keyboard Assy: havs five encoders with push function, 4 arrow keys and power On/Off key. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 13
[Page 144] 5-4-1-1 KEYBOARD Signal I/O Main keyboard assy have two main external I/O connectors. One is for USB connection to scan system for main control signal interface, the other is for 5V power supply and momentary switch of scan system with hard drive operation indicator. (a)Sub keyboard CON1 USB (b)Main Keyboard Figure 5-11 Main Keyboardand Sub Keyboardconnection to system Table 5-1 CON1 Connector Signal I/O Pin Nember Pin Name Signal Path 1 HDD- SYSCONML > BP128(Backplane) > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 2 HDD+ SYSCONML > BP128(Backplane) > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 3 Mementary S/W SYSCONML > BP128(Backplane) > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 4 GND 10 GND 11 GND 12 GND 13 KBD PWR APS II> BP128(Backplane) > Mani Keyboard > Sub Keyboard 14 KBD PWR APS II> BP128(Backplane) > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 5 - 14 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 145] 5-4-2 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Monitor LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro system has 17inch LCD monitor with DVI-I interface. Figure 5-12 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Monitor 5-4-2-1 MONITOR Signal I/O Monitor assy has two main I/O connectors, One is a DVI-I connector, and the other is a 110V/220V power plug. PWR DVI Figure 5-13 LP6 17” LCDMON Signal I/O Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 15
[Page 146] 5-4-2-2 LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro LCDMON control button function LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro LCDMON assy has three control buttons: Left button, Menu button, Right button. 1 2 3 Figure 5-14 LCDMON control buttons Table 5-3 main functions of control key buttons No Name Main Functions - Moves the highlight icon UP to select function 1 LEFT - Increases the adjustment of the selected function - When the OSD menu is off, press once : Performs "Contrast-adjustment" function - When the OSD menu is off, press twice : Performs "Brightness-adjustment" function - When the OSD menu is off, press thee times 2 MENU : Performs "Dim-Brightness-adjustment" function - When the OSD menu is off, press more than 5 seconds : Performs "OSD-adjustment" function - When the OSD menu is on : Selects the function that user wants - Moves the highlight icon Down to select funtion 3 RIGHT - Decreases the adjustment of the selected function Push "Menu" button to select the mode between Contrast, Brightness, and Dim Brightness mode. Then hold down "Left" and "Right" button until the value you want is set. The default values are 80% for the contrast, 80% for the Brightness, and 50% for the Dim-Brightness. Figure 5-15 Contrast, Brightness and Dim-Brightness adjustment 5 - 16 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 147] Section 5-5 P6 ARP II (Rear Panel) The LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro system has the I/O interfaces for peripherals in rear panel. P6 ARP II assy has connectors for peripheral. Composite in/out and S-VHS in/out are analog video interfaces for recording and playback of the VCR or DVD recorder. Audio in/out are audio interfaces for audio recording and playback of the VCR or DVD recorder. The analog VGA signal also provide display interface for external VGA monitor . Figure 5-16 P6 ARP II Block Diagram Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 17
[Page 148] 5-5-1 Input/Output Signals for peripheral Table 5-4 Input and Output signals for peripherals Signal Name Description Connection from/via/to SYSCONML -> P6 ARP II -> 7P LAN Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet Connector SYSCONML -> P6 ARPII -> LG Connector -> External VGA VGA signal output for external VGA monitor 15P DSUB Connector Foot Switch is mechanical switch that Foot Switch Foot Switch connector -> P6 ARP II (USB HUB) connect a signal to ground Composite out for DVD Recorder Compositer video signal output for DVDR SYSCONML -> P6 ARP II -> BNC Connector Composite in for DVD Recorder Compositer input from DVDR BNC Connector -> P6 ARP II -> SYSCONML S-VHS out for DVD Recorder S-VHS output signal for DVDR Recording SYSCONML -> P6 ARP II -> S-VHS Connector S-VHS in for DVD Recorder S-VHS input signal for DVDR playback S-VHS Connector ->P6 ARP II -> SYSCONML Audio out L/R for DVD Recorder Stereo audio output for DVDR Recording SYSCONML -> P6 ARP II -> RCA Jack Stereo audio input from DVDR for DVDR Audio In L/R for DVD Recorder RCA Jack -> P6 ARP II -> SYSCONML playback SYSCONML -> BP128(Backplane) -> USB USB Port for BW Printer USB Port for BW Printer Connector(dual R_A type) -> Front/BW Printer P6 ARP II (USB HUB) -> USB Connector(R_A USB Port for ECG USB Port for ECG type) -> ECG P6 ARP II (USB HUB) -> USB Connector(R_B USB Port for 4D USB Port for 4D type) -> 4D P6 ARP II (USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A USB Port for Digital Color Printer USB Port for Color Printer type) -> Color Printer P6 ARP II (USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A USB Port for DMC USB Port for DMC type) -> DMC P6 ARP II (USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A USB Port for USB Device USB Port for USB Device type) -> USB Device USB Port for remote control of VCR/DVD P6 ARP II (USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A USB Port for Remote Recorder type) -> VCR 5 - 18 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 149] Section 5-6 Cable Connection 5-6-1 Overview The cable connection can be separated to two group, internal harness and external cable connection for peripheral equipment. 5-6-2 Internal Cable MON MON MON ASPK ASPK ASPK BW BRKT BW BRKT BW BRKT SUB KBD SUB KBD SUB KBD L L L R R R PRN PRN PRN CON10 CON10 CON10 LCDMON LCDMON LCDMON CON10 CON10 CON10 FRONT BRKT FRONT BRKT MIC MIC F_USB F_USB DVI DVI DVI MAIN KBD MAIN KBD MAIN KBD CON1 CON1 CON1 KBD KBD KBD 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX MC4 MC4 MC4 MC3 MC3 MC3 J206 J206 J206 MC2 MC2 MC2 J209 J209 J209 USB HUB USB HUB USB HUB J14 J14 J14 MC1 MC1 MC1 J207 J207 J207 upstream upstream upstream J205 J205 J205 4D USB 4D USB 4D USB J16 J16 J16 J221 J221 J221 USB 0 USB 0 ECG Module ECG Module ECG Module J224 J224 USB 1 USB 1 ECG USB ECG USB ECG USB J18 J18 J18 USB 2 USB 2 J223 J223 VGA VGA VGA J20 J20 J20 USB 3 USB 3 MBP MBP MBP J208 J208 J19 J19 J19 Foot S/W Foot S/W Foot S/W J19 J19 J19 J220 J220 SATA SATA HDD HDD J219 J219 HDDI HDDI HDDP HDDP PATA PATA J204 J204 J204 AC AC AC AC AC AC ODD ODD J210 J210 J210 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT ECG conn ECG conn ECG conn CWD conn CWD conn CWD conn ODDI ODDI ODDP ODDP 4D conn 4D conn 4D conn J203 J203 J203 J15 J15 J15 CON9 CON9 CON9 J202 J202 J202 Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker CON9 CON9 CON9 J202 J202 L1SYSCON L1SYSCON L1SYSCON CON6 CON6 CON6 J13 J13 J13 CON6 CON6 CON6 J201 J201 J201 J201 J201 ACWD ACWD ACWD J7 J7 J7 CON7 CON7 CON7 CON7 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON2 CON2 CON2 J14 J14 J14 BL3FAN BL3FAN BL3FAN APS APS APS TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN APS APS APS APS APS Figure 5-17 Cable Connection - Internal The black boxes with white characters are the labels to describe destination, and the adjacent same name labels mean that the two connectors is connected each other. The dotted lines are optonal connections when the options are installed. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 19
[Page 150] 5-6-3 Peripherals connection A DVD recorder, a Black & White Video Printer and a Color Printer may be installed in system as onboard. These devices are connected to rear (P6 ARP II) or front side (bottom of keybaord). LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro does not support analog printer. 5-6-3-1 BW and Color printers Connect the Power and USB cable as shown in Figure 5-18.. Figure 5-18 Digital BW Printer Figure 5-19 Digital Color Printer 5 - 20 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 151] 5-6-3-2 DVD Recorder Connect the cables as shown in Figure 5-31.. Audio cable with RCA Jack S-Video Cable S-Video Cable Audio cable with RCA Jack Figure 5-20 DVD Recorder 5-6-4 Filters There are two filteres, located in both right and left sides of TRANSBOX(AP950) (a) (b) Figure 5-21 Location of Air Filter Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 21
[Page 152] 5-6-5 Fans There are 10 fans for ventilation in the system as below a.) DTRX64II Assy: 2 fans in each assy. b.) SYSCONML: 1 fan c.) APS II: 2 fans d.) NESTBOX top: 2 fans e.) TRANBOX: 1 fan (a) Cooling Fan on L2 SYSCON II(SYSCONML) (b) Cooling Fans on APS (c) FANs in DTRX64 II (d) Cooling FAN Assy for NEST Cooling (e) TRANS BOX FAN Figure 5-22 Location of Fans 5 - 22 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 153] Section 5-7 Service Platform 5-7-1 Introduction The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e- Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 23
[Page 154] 5-7-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) 5-7-2-1 Internationalization The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface. 5-7-2-2 Service Login Enable utility menu by pressing the untility key in A/N key. Select service menu button on the screen. This service button on screen links the user or the Field Engineer (FE) to the service login screen. Figure 5-23 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface 5-7-2-3 Access / Security The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use. NOTE: A Service Dongle is necessary for use by GE Service when performing proprietary level diagnostics. OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have ‘ Disruptive ’ permission and customer input to run diagnostics. Table 5-5 Service Login User Levels User Level Access Authorization Password Operator uls Authorized acccess to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same Administrator uls acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service. External Service gogems Knowledge of a service level password. rotating security GE Service A physical Service Key (Dongle) required password NOTE: For a GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password is tied to the service key. Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users. 5 - 24 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 155] 5-7-3 iGlobal Service User Interface (GSUI) GSUI is the pattern for the user interface. This interface standard will be followed by all modalities to achieve a common look-and-feel for service software across all GEMS products. 5-7-3-1 Internationalization The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. At this time there is no multi-lingual capability built into the Common Service Interface. 5-7-3-2 Service Login 1) Touch Utility > Service . It will take about 1p seconds for activationg 2) make sure that CAPS is OFF for password entry performed later. 3) The Service Login window for Service Platform will be shown on the monitor dispaly. Figure 5-24 Login Screen 5-7-3-3 Access / Security The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use. NOTE: A Service Dongle is necessary for use by GE Service when performing proprietary level diagnostics. OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have ‘ Disruptive ’ permission and customer input to run diagnostics. Table 5-6 Service Login User Levels User Level Access Authorization These service tools are normally used in-house and are protected with a Operator special scanner configuration that is not allowd t leave the facility. Administrator Use the On Line Cenetr access method provided by iLinq. External Service For a external Service other than GE FE. GE Service Require a network connection and knowledge of password. NOTE: For a GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals. All access to the service interface is via the network port. Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 25
[Page 156] 5-7-4 Service Home Page When the Service Interface is started, the Service Home Page appears. The Home Page contains the software revision along with the hardware inventory and the results of the latest System Health Information. The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities. Figure 5-25 Service Home Page 5 - 26 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 157] 5-7-5 Error Logs Tab From the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users. The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer level analysis. The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance. Table 5-7 Log Entry Key Severity Error Level Color Code 1 Information Green 2 Warning Blue 3 Error Red The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD, and CD-ROM drive. Figure 5-26 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 27
[Page 158] 5-7-5-1 Logs The seven sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, and DICOM. NOTE: Figure 5-26 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs . Log table headings for the different logs are as follows: • System Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. • Infomatics Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight, ExamID, Exam Category, ExamCurDate, and ExamStartTime. • Temperature Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; L1SYSCON temperature sensor. • Probe Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; Error Message; Severity; Revision; and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named. • DICOM Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. 5-7-5-2 Exit The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer , returns the user to the Service Desktop home page. Figure 5-27 Exit Log Sub-Menu 5 - 28 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 159] 5-7-6 Diagnostics NOTE: When Service Login for FRU Diagnostic, scan mode must be B-mode. WARNING WARNING Diagnostics should be performed with probes which have 128 or more elements Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Diagnostics/Troubleshooting. Figure 5-28 GE Service Diagnostic Page NOTE: After finishing Diagnostic test, the system should be rebooted. 5-7-6-1 Diagnostics Execution Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics. 5-7-6-2 Diagnostic Reports Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs. 5-7-6-3 Proactive Diagnostics A system of self-monitoring is largely supported with the integration of Insite2. The scheduler, executive, user interfaces, and some of the proactive diagnostic functions are provided by Insite2. Other tasks should be provided by the Product team. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 29
[Page 160] 5-7-7 Image Quality Field is not yet populated. The Image Quality page contains tools for troubleshooting image quality issues. Figure 5-29 Image Quality Page 5-7-8 Calibration Field is not yet populated. The Calibration page contains the tools used to calibrate the system. Figure 5-30 Calibration Page 5 - 30 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 161] 5-7-9 Configuration Field is not yet populated. The Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system. The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem.. Figure 5-31 Configuration Page 5-7-9-1 Questra Agent Configuration These feature that allow the customer to register the system to the GE OnLine Center are available for Warranty and Contract customers only. 5-7-9-1-1 Device Information Divce name and CRM No. are displayed by default. 5-7-9-1-2 Advanced Configuration Select Enterprise Server to check out to. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 31
[Page 162] 5-7-9-1-3 Proxy Configuration. If Proxy is used in the site, it should be filled proper Proxy Server Address and Proxy Server Port. And Press “Submit Changes” button to finish check out process. Figure 5-32 Proxy Configuration 5-7-10 Utilities The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools. Figure 5-33 GE Service Utilities Page 5 - 32 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 163] 5-7-11 Replacement The Replacement page is intended to contain the tools used to track replacement parts used in the system. Figure 5-34 Part Replacement Page 5-7-12 PM The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system. Figure 5-35 Planned Maintenance Page Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 33
[Page 164] 5-7-13 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates The Service Platform provides for remote software downloads. Any file transferred to the scanner will be in the form of an installation package. The actual content of the installation package is dependent on each product. Software installation is simple and automated with a Graphic User Interface (GUI), where applicable. Supports software upload via remote transmission Supports software upload via Service Platform Options can be activated permanently Options can be activated for a timed period Options can be limited to a number of uses Options that expire must give notice to the user that the option has expired 5-7-13-1 Remote System Shutdown and Restart The Service Platform provides the ability to restart the system as per standard shutdown/startup procedures. Remote shutdown will only be provided if a software-controlled shutdown exists on the scanner. Scanner system restart is always accessible from the OLC. 5-7-13-2 File and/or Image Transfer The Service Platform supports file transfers and archived image transfers to the OnLine Center. The Service Platform provides interfaces of the displayed images for transfer to the OLC. 5 - 34 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 165] Section 5-8RFS (Service For Request) 5-8-1 General This describes general RFS functionality. 1.) RFS function is a call for service to be used by customer or FE directly from the system instead of calling GE Cares 5-8-2 System Checkout Procedure If the system is checked out already, skip 5-8-2 - System Checkout Procedure and proceed from 5-8- 3 - Sending RFS Procedure . 1.) Check if the system is connected to the network. 2.) Go to “Utility” 3.) Press “Service” 4.) Log on to the Service Platform with a password. 5.) Press “Configuration” 6.) Press “InSite ExC Agent Configuration” Figure 5-36 Agent Configuration Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 35
[Page 166] 5-8-2 System Checkout Procedure (cont’d) All bold fields should be filled 7.) Device Name and CRM No are pre-populated and can not be changed. 8.) Select Continent and Country 9.) Put City, State, and Institution 10.)Select “Product” for the Enterprise. 11.)If Proxy needs to be configured, select “Enable” for the Proxy filed and input IP address and Port number. 12.)Press “Submit Changes”. “Please Wait” message is displayed while the system is checking out. Figure 5-37 Figure 5-37 Please Wait 5 - 36 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 167] 5-8-2 System Checkout Procedure (cont’d) 13.)Wait until following screen displays. Refer to the Figure 5-38. Figure 5-38 Configuration done 14.)Configuration is complete. 15.)Close the Service Platform. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 37
[Page 168] 5-8-3 Sending RFS Procedure Service Platform should be turned off in order to open RFS window. System must be connected to network, configured and checked out to be able to send the RFS. 1.) Right Click on “Connect to GE” icon. Figure 5-39 Contact GE Icon All the fields that are marked with asterisk * are mandatory and should be filled in order to send the RFS request to On Line Center . 2.) Fill out the Last name, First name, and Phone number. Refer to the Figure 5-40. 3.) Extension, Email, and Other system ID fields are optional. 4.) Select Problem Type. If Problem is about “No Boot”, “No Image”, “Error message”, “Lock up”, “Probe”, “Peripherals”, select “ Service ” for the Problem Type. If Problem is about “Presets”, “Reports”, “Measurements”, or “Probe not recognized”, select “ Applications ” for the Problem Type. 5.) Select the Problem Area. 6.) Write the detailed problem description in the Problem Description field. Figure 5-40 RFS window 5 - 38 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 169] 5-8-3 Sending RFS Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Then the “Send” button is enabled.(Figure 5-41) Figure 5-41 RFS send enabled 8.) Verify that "Send" button is enabled. 9.) Click “Send” button and wait for confirmation window with reference number on the screen. 10.)Verify that "confirmation message" pops up in the screen. 11.)RFS request is completed. 12.)On Line Center will contact the customer shortly by phone. Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 39
[Page 170] Section 5-9Machine RFS 5-9-1 General This describes general MRFS (Machine RFS) functionality. 1.) MRFS function is an automatic call for service from the system to the OLC when system detects high temperature or high or low voltage. 5-9-2 Enabling MRFS NOTE: In order to enable MRFS, System must be connected to network and should be checked out to a product server. Default MRFS user should also be set. 1.) If a system is not already checked out, the system should be checked out to a product server. Refer to 5-8-2) System Checkout Procedure 2.) MRFS function is an automatic call for service from the system to the OLC when system detects high temperature or high or low voltage. 3.) Right Click on “Connect to GE” icon. Figure 5-42 Contact GE Icon 4.) When RFS window pops up, click on “Users” tab. Figure 5-43 User tab 5 - 40 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 171] 5.) Press “Add User”. Figure 5-44 Add User All the fields that are marked with asterisk * are mandatory and should be filled 6.) When fields with asterisk are filled, “Add User” button is enabled. Figure 5-45 Add User 7.) Pess “Add User” button. 8.) check the checkbox next to the name to set to the default contact. Then Press “Set Default Machine Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 41
[Page 172] Contact” button, Figure 5-46 Set Default Machine contact 9.) Now the MRFS is enabled. 10.)When system detects high temperature or abnormal voltage, the system will send the RFS to the OLC automatically. 5 - 42 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 173] Section 5-10Fast Polling 5-10-1 General This describes Fast Polling feature that willl chnage the polling rate to 15 seconds for 10 minutes. 5-10-2 Enabling Fast Polling 1.) Right Click on “Connect to GE” icon. Figure 5-47 Pressing “OK” will change the polling rate to 15 seconds for 10 minutes. Figure 5-48 Agent Configuration Section 5-1 - Overview 5 - 43
[Page 174] This page was intentionally left blank. 5 - 44 Section 5-1 - Overview
[Page 175] Chapter 6 Service Adjustments Section 6-1 Overview 6-1-1 Purpose of this chapter 6 This section describes how to test and adjust the scanner. These tests are optional. You may use them to check the system for errors. Table 6-1 Contents in chapter Section Description Page Number 6-1 Overview 6-1 6-2 Regulatory 6-1 6-3 Monitor Adjustments 6-2 6-4 Trackball Cleaning 6-4 Section 6-2 Regulatory Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented. Section 6-1 - Overview 6 - 1
[Page 176] Section 6-3 Monitor Adjustments 6-3-1 Brightness and Contrast Adjusting the monitor's contrast and brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image quality. If these controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range and even Power Output may have to be changed more often than necessary to compensate. The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest level of black should just disappear into the background and the highest white should be bright, but not saturated. To adjust the contrast: 1.) Press the Toggle button on the display monitor once. 2.) Press the Adjustment (+) button to increase contrast. Press the Adjustment (-) button to decrease contrast. 3.) The amount of contrast is shown on a slide bar on the screen. To adjust the brightness: 4.) Press the Toggle button on the display monitor twice. 5.) Press the Adjustment (+) button to increase brightness. Press the Adjustment (-) button to decrease brightness. 6.) The amount of brightness is shown on a slide bar on the screen. Figure 6-1 Brightness and Contrast 1. Contrast Indicator 2. Brightness Indicator 3. Dim Brightness Indicator 4. Adjustment (-) Button 5. Toggle Button 6. Adjustment (+) Button Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s). NOTE: After readjusting the monitor's Contrast and Brightness, readjust all preset and peripheral settings. 6 - 2 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments
[Page 177] 6-3-2 Monitor Arm Locking Flexible LCD arm’s rotation movement can be adjusted by using the LCD arm’s locking mechanism. To unlock the LCD arm: 1.) Pull the LCD arm toggle knob and turn clockwise to unlock the LCD arm. Figure 6-2 Unlocking the Flexible LCD arm To lock the LCD arm : 1.) Turn counter clockwise and push the LCD arm toggle knob and to lock the LCD arm. Figure 6-3 Locking the Flexible LCD arm Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments 6 - 3
[Page 178] Section 6-4 Trackball Cleaning The trackball on the keyboard need to be cleaning periodically. 1.) Open the trackball. Figure 6-4 Open Trackball Remove dust inside of bucket Figure 6-5 Trackball Hole 6 - 4 Section 6-4 - Trackball Cleaning
[Page 179] Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Section 7-1 Overview 7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7 This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level. NOTE: Be sure to disable ECG function before performing Diagnostic function. NOTE: Make sure that convex or linear probe is connected before the sytem starts. (sector probe is not applicable for the service diagnostics) Table 7-1 Contents in Chapter 7 Section Description Page Number 7-1 Overview 7-1 7-2 Gathering Trouble Data 7-2 7-3 Screen Captures 7-4 7-4 Diagnostics 7-8 7-5 Screen Captures 7-9 7-6 Diagnostics 7-13 7-7 Common Diagnostics 7-14 7-8 LED Descriptions 7-25 7-9 Trouble Shooting Tree 7-27 Section 7-1 - Overview 7 - 1
[Page 180] Section 7-2 Gathering Trouble Data 7-2-1 Overview There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results. 7-2-2 Collect Vital System Information The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer: - Product Name = LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro From the Utility>System>About screen: Applications Software - Software Version - Software Part Number System Image Software - Image Part Number - Image Date 7 - 2 Section 7-2 - Gathering Trouble Data
[Page 181] 7-2-3 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs If the system should malfunction, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This will collect a screen capture of the image monitor, system presets and the following logs: - Keyboard Shadow Log - Error Logs - Crash Log - Power Supply - Temperature NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. This Alt-D function is available at all times. Figure 7-1 ALT-D Dialog Box When Alt-D is pressed, a menu box appears that allows for: - A place to enter a description of the problem - A choice to store to a pre-formatted CD-R/DVD, USB or Network storage. The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression. Section 7-2 - Gathering Trouble Data 7 - 3
[Page 182] Section 7-3 Screen Captures There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key. The P2 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P2 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps: 1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print2 button. 2.) Set the Print2 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture. 3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive or CD-R / DVD-R. 4.) Restore the Print2 button to it’s original settings. 7-3-1 Check and Record the P2 Key Function Check the function of the Print2 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings. 1.) Select Utilit y from the FrontPanel. The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-7. Figure 7-2 Buttons Set Up Screen P2 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-7, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings. 7 - 4 Section 7-3 - Screen Captures
[Page 183] 7-3-1 Check and Record the P2 Key Function (cont’d) 5.) In the “Physical Print Buttons”box, record the followings. 6.) In the “Printflow View”, record the print flow associated with the Print2 Button. 7-3-2 Setting the P2 Key to Screen Capture If the P2 Key is not set to screen capture: 1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section. 2.) Ensure that Capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary Capture and None Image Compression. 3.) The P2 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard). Section 7-3 - Screen Captures 7 - 5
[Page 184] 7-3-3 Capturing a Screen The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner: 1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured. 2.) Press P2 . This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display. Clipboard Thumbnails Menu Figure 7-3 Select Image to Capture 3.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive or CD-R / DVD-R. 4.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS. Save As Figure 7-4 Menu > Save As 7 - 6 Section 7-3 - Screen Captures
[Page 185] 7-3-3 Capturing a Screen (cont’d) Figure 7-5 Save Dialog Box 5.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose the destination as the archive location to save the image on the CD-R/DVD-R, USB or network storage. 7-3-4 Reset the P2 Key to Customer’s Functionality If the customer had programmed the P2 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in section 7-5-1 on page 9. Refer to the Figure 7-7. 1.) Select Utilit y from the Keyboard. 5.) In the “Physical Print Buttons”box, select the options recorded in step 5, Section 7-5-1. : Section 7-3 - Screen Captures 7 - 7
[Page 186] Section 7-4 Diagnostics As described in "Components and Functions (Theory)" on page 5-1, the service platform uses a web- based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Common Diagnostics, and LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests. Figure 7-6 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen 7 - 8 Section 7-4 - Diagnostics
[Page 187] Section 7-5 Screen Captures There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key. The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P2 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps: 1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print2 button. 2.) Set the Print2 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture. 3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive or CD-R. 4.) Restore the Print2 button to it’s original settings. 7-5-1 Check and Record the P2 Key Function Check the function of the Print2 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings. 1.) Select Utilit y from the FrontPanel. The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-7. Figure 7-7 Buttons Set Up Screen P2 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-7, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings. Section 7-5 - Screen Captures 7 - 9
[Page 188] 7-5-1 Check and Record the P2 Key Function (cont’d) 5.) In the “Physical Print Buttons”box, record the followings. 6.) In the “Printflow View”, record the print flow associated with the Print2 Button. 7-5-2 Setting the P2 Key to Screen Capture If the P2 Key is not set to screen capture: 1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section. 2.) Ensure that Capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary Capture and None Image Compression. 3.) The P2 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard). 7 - 10 Section 7-5 - Screen Captures
[Page 189] 7-5-3 Capturing a Screen The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner: 1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured. 2.) Press P2 . This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display. Clipboard Thumbnails Menu Figure 7-8 Select Image to Capture 3.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive or CD-R. 4.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS. Save As Figure 7-9 Menu > Save As Section 7-5 - Screen Captures 7 - 11
[Page 190] 7-5-3 Capturing a Screen (cont’d) Figure 7-10 Save Dialog Box 5.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the image on the hard disk or CD-R or USB. The InSite connection will have access to the export folder on the “D” drive to retrieve these images. 7-5-4 Reset the P2 Key to Customer’s Functionality If the customer had programmed the P2 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in section 7-5-1 on page 9. Refer to the Figure 7-7. 1.) Select Utilit y from the Keyboard. 5.) In the “Physical Print Buttons”box, select the options recorded in step 5, Section 7-5-1. : 7 - 12 Section 7-5 - Screen Captures
[Page 191] Section 7-6 Diagnostics As described in - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Common Diagnostics, and LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests. Figure 7-11 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen Section 7-6 - Diagnostics 7 - 13
[Page 192] Section 7-7 Common Diagnostics Common Diagnostics is the first main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics. Figure 7-12 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below. Figure 7-12 Common Diagnostics 7-7-1 Utilities Provides two selections: 7-7-1-1 Disruptive Mode Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite, this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation. 7-7-1-2 System Shutdown Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not. After submitting to or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request. 7 - 14 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 193] 7-7-2 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) 7-7-2-1 CPU Tests • CPU Test (All) - This diagnostic performs a battery of tests on your CPU to ensure it is working properly. The following tests are a complete list of the tests performed on the PC's CPU. • CPU: Registers - The CPU registers are tested using the default test patterns defined above. On 32 bit CPUs, the extended registers are also checked. If errors are detected, the failed registers are listed. • CPU: Arithimetics - Tests the proper function of arithmetic commands ADC, ADD, DEC, DIV, IDIV, IMUL, INC, MUL, SBB and SUB with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed. • CPU: String Operations - Tests the proper operation of string commands LODS, MOVS, SCAS and STOS with 8, 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed. • CPU: Logical Operations - Tests the proper operation of logical operations AND, NOT, OR and XOR with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed operands are listed. • CPU: Math Registers - Tests coprocessor register stack, pointers and commands FLDLZ, FLDPI, FLDLN2, FLDLG2, FLDL2T, FLDL2E and FLD1. If errors are detected, the failed steps and commands are listed. • CPU: Math Commands - Tests coprocessor commands FBLD/FBSTP, FLD/FST, FXCH, FCOM, FICOM, FTST, FXAM and FUCOM. If errors are detected, the failed instructions are listed. • CPU: Math Arithimetics - • CPU: Transcendental - Tests coprocessor transcendental commands F2XM1, FPATAN, FPTAN, FYL2X, FYL2XP1, FCOS, FSIN and FSINCOS. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Arithmetic - Tests MMX commands PADD, PSUB, PMUL and PMADD. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Logical - Tests MMX commands PAND, PANDN, POR and PXOR. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Shift - Tests MMX commands PSLL and PSRL. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Data Transfer - Tests MMX commands MOVD and MOVQ. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Misc. - Tests MMX commands PCMPEQ, PCMPGT, PACKSS, PACKUS, PUNPCK and PUNPCK. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics 7 - 15
[Page 194] 7-7-2-2 Hard Drive Tests • Hard Drive Test (All) - The Hard Drive test examines your hard disk drive using a series of tests to ensure that your drive can perform its functions. The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the hard disk controller and the drive mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked. NOTE: The hard drive test can take over ten minutes. • Hard Drive: Linear Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a time. • Hard Drive: Random Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times. • Hard Drive: Funnel Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved in a funnel fashion, i.e., from the first track on the drive to the last, then to the second track, then to the second to last track, then to the third track, and so on. • Hard Drive: Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the hard disk drive. 7-7-2-3 Memory Tests • Memory Test (All) - Eighteen test patterns are used to test memory locations. If errors are detected, the address of the block the error was detected in is shown. During testing, these diagnostics will also look out for parity errors and other exceptions. These will be added to the Test Log as errors if encountered. • Memory: Pattern Test - PC-Doctor uses several test patterns to test as much memory as possible. • Memory: Parity Test - This test checks for parity errors on the memory bus during intensive string transfer operations. If an error is detected, the address of the failed block is displayed. 7 - 16 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 195] 7-7-2-4 CD/DVD Drive Test NOTE: Although the global aspect of the diagnostics allow for DVD testing, the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro does not have a DVD drive.(Option) • DVD/CD-ROM Test (All) - The CD-ROM/DVD test examines the CD-ROM/DVD drive to make sure it is working properly. You may use either a data CD-ROM disk or a DVD disk for these tests. You cannot use an audio CD, such as a regular commercial music CD, with this test. NOTE: The PC is sometimes slow in recognizing a newly inserted CD-ROM/DVD disk. It is best to wait a few seconds after inserting a disk into the drive before you run any tests. There are two types of CD-ROM/DVD tests: 1.) Seek Tests: Ensures the drive can access all locations on a disk, and 2.) Read Tests: Ensures the drive can read all the data. • DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk in a linear fashion, starting from the first to the last. • DVD/CD-ROM: Random Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk randomly. • DVD/CD-ROM: Funnel Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk in a funnel fashion, starting from the first then moving to the last, then, at the next pass starting from the second location then moving to the next to the last, and so on • DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD in a linear fashion, starting from the start to the end. • DVD/CD-ROM: Random Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD randomly. 7-7-2-5 Video Test • Video Test (All) - This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the video memory with 18 patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see these tests being performed on your monitor. You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key. The following tests are performed on your monitor: • Video: Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one pattern at a time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color. • Video: Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These tests will appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes and colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed. • Video: Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video device driver and video controller. Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics 7 - 17
[Page 196] 7-7-2-6 USB Test(Not yet supported) • USB Test (All) • USB Configuration Test • USB Devices Test 7-7-2-7 PCI Board Configuration Test A bus is a set of circuits, wires or connectors which connect the various components of your system. A PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus is a fast standard bus which is common in Pentium systems. Various tests are run on the PCI bus in order to ensure it is working up to speed. The motherboard is scanned to verify the configuration space and to make sure the diagnostics can communicate with the board. 7-7-2-8 Network Test 7 - 18 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 197] 7-7-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) 7-7-3-1 Keyboard Test 1.) Click Keyboard Test from the PC Diagnostics interactive tests menu. 2.) Click the Test button. A keyboard layout is displayed on which you can see the keys of your keyboard. 3.) Press each key on your keyboard once and make sure that the corresponding keys on-screen are removed from view. If a key on-screen is not removed, that key may be damaged and you may have to have your keyboard repaired or replaced. 4.) To reset the keyboard, click the Reset Keys button. 5.) To exit the test, click Close. 7-7-3-2 Audio Test 1.) Click Audio Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu. 2.) To test the WAV sound reproduction click Left Channel, Right Channel, or Both Channels to test your speakers. You should hear a guitar chord. 3.) To test MIDI sound reproduction click the button under MIDI. You should hear a few seconds of recorded music. 4.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low "beep" from your PC. If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the More Info button in the Audio Test dialog box for information about possible causes and solutions. 7-7-3-3 Monitor Test Click Monitor Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu. The monitor test dialog box presents you with three options: • Combination Test - Checks the monitor for alignment, color depth, and monitor resolution. It will put four cross-hairs in each corner, RGB (Red Green Blue) spectrum arrays and horizontal and vertical alignment bars on the screen. NOTE: In most cases, you will choose the Combination Test. • Solid Color Test - The solid color test is for laptops and LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel display. This test displays solid color screens to allow you to make sure all color pixels are operating correctly. • VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) Test Patterns - The VESA test patterns checks luminance, geometry, and focus. The VESA tests are designed for professional measurement use. Figure 7-8 shows the top level menu choices under LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections that follow. Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics 7 - 19
[Page 198] 7-7-4 FRU Test 7-7-4-1 SYSCONML These programs are provided for testing the SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM board. Table 7-2 FRU Test, SYSCONPM/SYSCONCMDiagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the SYSCONML assy tests listed below All None Assy Revision Test Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and read All None Displays the board revision of the SYSCONML assy The DTRX64II, PI128II, optional CWD64 assya are connected to the SYSCONML via the FEBUS. USC I/F Test All None The DSP in SYSCONML accesses the boards above to check if the FEBUS is connected properly to each assy. Checks if The DSP in SYSCONML accesses the assys, DTRX64II and CWD64, via FEBUS Test All None the FEBUS. TRIG Test Check the trigger max, min and ever interval All None PCI I/F Test Sends the command to the DSP to check the SDRAM in SYSCONML All None DSP Memory Test Sends the command to the DSP to check the internal DSP memory All None Board Temperature Read SYSCONML Assy Temperature. All None CHACOM I/F Test Sends the command to read / write data from DSP to CHACOMs All None 7 - 20 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 199] 7-7-4-2 DTRX64II These programs are provided for testing the DTRX64II assy. Table 7-3 FRU Test, DTRX64II Assy Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the DTRX64II board tests listed below All None Assy Revision Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and read All None Displays the board revision of the DTRX64II board USC I/F Test Checks if the DSP in SYSCONML can access the DTRX64IIboards via FEBUS. All None FEBUS Test Checks if the DSP in SYSCONML can access the DTRX64II Assy via FEBUS. All None Sends the test data High, Mid, Low level to PGC Register, then DTRX64II read result PGC Test All None data and verify it. Sends the test data High, Mid, Low level to Test wave Register, then DTRX64II read TEST Wave Test All None result data and verify it. Beamforming Data Memory Send the command to read / write to beamforming data memory in DTRX64II assy. All None Send test wave pattern to the input stage of preamp on DTRX64II, and perform 64 GE FE RX Channel Test channel scanning, Read raw data, and analyze it. Only Send test wave pattern to the DTRX64II assy, and capture a returned echo signal, GE FE TX Channel Test Read the data and analyze it. Only Note: APSII HV test is requried prior to the TRX TX channel test. Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics 7 - 21
[Page 200] 7-7-4-3 PI128 II (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro) These programs are provided for testing the PI128 II assy. NOTE: A Convex Probe is needed for PI128 II Channel Test. Table 7-4 FRU Test, PI128 II Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the PI128II assy tests listed below All None Assy Revision Test EEPROM. Test Reads the assy revision of the PI128 II assy. FEBUS Test Checks if the DSP in SYSCONML can access the PI128 II assy via FEBUS.. All None SHV Testt Send the command to SHV resister in PI128 II assy to read SHV status. All None OPEN Test Checks whether probe connected or not on PI128 II assy. All Probe Checks if the 8 bits of the Probe Code in the probe connector is properly connected. PROBE CODE All If connected probe is available, display code and Probe name. 7-7-4-4 CWD64 (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro) These programs are provided for testing the CWD64 assy. Table 7-5 FRU Test, CWD64 Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the CWD64 board test listed below All None Assy Revision Test EEPROM.Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and readDisplays the board TEst revision of the CWD64 assy. USC Interface Checks if the DSP in SYSCONML can access the CWD64 assy via FEBUS. All None Allows SYSCONML to access FEBUS interface in the CWD64 in order to check if FE FEBUS Test All bus line is normal. Send the command to perform CW scanning, read IQ data from assigned memory, IQ Data Read All analyze the data with FFT algorithm. CWD TPG Test Read write the TPG Registor in CWD64 via FEBUS. Probe Checks whether Dedicated CWD probe connected or not. All Connection Generate test pattern, perform 48 channel scanning in CWD64, read the data and Channel Test All analyze it. 7 - 22 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 201] 7-7-4-5 P3RLY (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro PRO) These programs are provided for testing the P3RLY board. NOTE: A Convex Probe is needed for RLY Channel Test. Table 7-6 FRU Test, P3RLY Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the P3RLY board tests listed below All None Assy Revision Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and readDisplays the board revision of the All None P3RLY board Checks if the DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM can access the P3RLY board via FE FEBUS Test All None bus. SHV Testt Send the command to SHV resister in P3RLY board to read SHV status. All None OPEN Test Checks whether probe connected or not on P3RLY. All Probe Checks if the 8 bits of the Probe Code in the probe connector is properly connected. PROBE CODE All None If connected probe is available, display code and Probe name. 7-7-4-6 ACWD (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro PRO) These programs are provided for testing the ACWD board. Table 7-7 FRU Test, ACWD Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the ACWD board test listed below All None Assy Revision Test EEPROM.Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and readDisplays the board TEst revision of the ACWD board USC Interface Checks if the DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCNCM can access the ACWD boards via USB Test bus. Allows SYSCONPM/SYSCNCM to access FE bus interface in the ACWD in order to FEBUS Test All None check if FE bus line is normal. Send the command to perform CW scanning, read IQ data from assigned memory, IQ Data Read All None analyze the data with FFT algorithm. CWD TPG Test Read write the TPG register in ACWD via FEBUS. All None Probe Checks whether ACWD probe connected or not. All None Connection Generate test pattern, perform 32 channel scanning in ACWD, read the data and Channel Test All None analyze it. Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics 7 - 23
[Page 202] 7-7-4-7 APS II These programs are provided for testing the APS IIboard. Table 7-8 FRU Test, APS II Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the APS test listed below All None HV voltage Read HV voltage and display HV values. All None stability LV voltage Read HV voltage and display LV values. All None stability 7-7-4-8 Keyboard These programs are provided for testing the Front panel. Table 7-9 FRU Test, Keybaord Diagnostics Menu FRONT PANEL Performs all of the Front Panel tests listed below All None Overall FRONT PANEL Test EEPROM.Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and read.Displays the board Revision revision of the Front Panel. ROM Makes a check of internal ROM check sum. All None Writes / reads data over all address of RAM and also makes a check of control RAM All None program. EEPROM Writes / reads data over all address of EEPROM All None SWITCH Test switch in Front Panel. All None Rotate or depress any key, Verify that it is displayed on the 17” LCD monitor. To finish Echoback All None the test, press "Abort" key and wait until complete message appears. NOTE: For the EchoBack test, it is highly recommended to press a button less than two times per a second. NOTE: When Abort button is pressed to finish EchoBack test, you have to wait until “Completed..” message is displayed to proceed other tests. 7 - 24 Section 7-7 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 203] Section 7-8 LED Descriptions 7-8-1 DTRX64II Assy The DTRX64II Assys are located at the No.1 and No.2 slot in the NEST Assy. Table 7-10 LED on DTRX64II Assy LED Descriptions Normal State DS1 FPGA configuration OK status Indicator Normally Blinking 7-8-2 PI128 II Assy (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro) The PI128 II Assy is located at the front of the NEST Assy. Table 7-11 LEDs on PI128 II Assy LED Descriptions Normal State D1 MUX embedded Probe Recognition Indicator Normally On D2 Selected probe connector position number bit 0 Depend on live probe position D3 Selected probe connector position number bit 1 Depend on live probe position D4 FPGA Configuration OK status indicator Normally On 7-8-3 P3RLY Assy (LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro PRO) The P3RLY Assy is located at the front of the NEST Assy. Table 7-12 LEDs on P3RLY/P2RLY Assy LED Descriptions Normal State D1 MUX embedded Probe Recognition Indicator Normally On D2 Selected probe connector position number bit 0 Depend on live probe position D3 Selected probe connector position number bit 1 Depend on live probe position D4 FPGA Configuration OK status indicator Normally On 7-8-4 SYSCONML Assy The SYSCONML Assy is located at the No.4 slot of the NEST Assy. Table 7-13 LEDs on L1SYSCON Assy LED Descriptions Normal State DS1 CPDI FPGA configuration OK indicator Normally On DS2 Frame Start signal. Scan running status indicator Normally blinking on scanning DS3 FEBC FPGA configuration OK indicator Normally On DS4 DSP operation OK indicator Normally blinking Section 7-8 - LED Descriptions 7 - 25
[Page 204] 7-8-5 APS II Assy The APS Assy is located at the No. 5 slot of the NEST Assy. Table 7-14 LEDs on APS IIAssy LED Descriptions Normal State DP5 (Top) Digital 5V output indicator Normally On LP5 Live Power 5V output indicator Normally On AP6 Analog 6V output indicator Normally On DP33 Digital 3.3V output indicator Normally On SHV+ SHV+ output indicator status indicator Normally On HVL+ HVL+ level indicator Normally On in CFM mode or PW mode HVH+ (Bottom) HVH+ level indicator Normally On in B mode 7 - 26 Section 7-8 - LED Descriptions
[Page 205] Section 7-9Trouble Shooting Tree 7-9-1 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up Is the scanner NO plugged in? Make sure the scanner is not plugged into Yes emergency power (red outlet); Is the AC at the NO Check if wall power is alive wall outlet? Yes Is the circuit NO breaker ON? Yes Check if the standby 5V od APS is alive Make sure AC power connector and con- Press the on/off switch to trol signal connector is plugged properly boot the system. Is the NO on/off switch illuminated with an green color and can you listen fan sound of inside? Yes If HDD indicator is blinking after power NO Does the scanner on, check the monitor cable boot up? Check BIOS or replace PM SOM module Yes Scanner is ON and ready for use. Figure 7-13 Power On / Boot Up Flowchart Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 27
[Page 206] 7-9-2 System Does Not Boot System doesn’t boot! Is the AC power cable NO seated to the Scanner and to the wall power outlet? Connect the AC power cable between the Scanner and the wall power outlet in right way. Is the main breaker turned NO ON? Turn ON the main breaker of YES the Scanner. Has the ON/OFF NO key on the Control Panel been pressed once? Press the ON/OFF button on the Control Panel. Go on to the next page. Figure 7-14 System does not Boot 7 - 28 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 207] 7-9-3 System Does Not Boot System doesn’t boot! (cont’d) NO Do the fans start to run? Check; YES 1.) AC Power 2.) AC Transformer NO Is the SOM module starting Check/replace the PM SOM/CM to display start-up screens SOMmodule. on the monitor? NO Is the LOGIQ starting display shown on the monitor? Turn off the power, wait a few seconds, and try to turn on the power again. Go on to the next page. Figure 7-15 System does not Boot (contd.) Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 29
[Page 208] 7-9-3 System Does Not Boot (cont’d) System doesn’t boot! (cont’d) Are the Control Panel NO keys lit? 1.) Check the Control Panel cable connection. 2.) Check/replace Control Panel. END Is regular scan display NO shown on the monitor? Press and hold the main switch for YES five (5) seconds to reboot the system. Go to Scan Procedure section. Figure 7-16 System does not Boot (contd.) 7 - 30 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 209] 7-9-4 Noise in Image Noise is shown in Image. Is there any electrical YES devices that affect the Scanner? NO Keep the Scanner away from those electrical devices. Check probes. Figure 7-17 Noise in Image Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 31
[Page 210] 7-9-5 Unable to Scan Unable to scan! Are probes connected in NO right way? Check the probe connection. END Are other operations possible? NO Check the HV power supply unit. Restart the scanner. Figure 7-18 Unable to Scan 7 - 32 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 211] 7-9-6 Trackball The trackball is low sensitive! Does the trackball move at YES all? NO Remove the ball from the Trackball, and clean it. Replace the trackball unit. Figure 7-19 Trackball Troubleshooting Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 33
[Page 212] 7-9-7 Monitor Troubleshooting NOTE: Reset the monitor settings to the factory defaults prior to troubleshooting the monitor. NOTICE Comments to remember about the 17” monitor. The monitor is the diagnostic monitor and is connected to AC 110/220 VAC. The monitor powers down with the console. Power output from AC Power assy via AC distributor in AC Transbox assy: 7 - 34 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 213] 7-9-7 Monitor Troubleshooting (cont’d) Press once the on/off switch. Press and hold on/off switch until Is the shutdown dialog NO system shut down. box displayed? Yes Shutdown the scanner from a software screen or depress the ON/OFF switch Press and hold the ON/OFF switch on the scanner for approximately 5 seconds. If the scanner fails to Shut Off, follow the step below. Did the scanner NO Shut off? Check cable connection If the scanner still does not Shut off, Switch the circuit breaker to the OFF Yes position. Switch the breaker to the OFF position.to completely Power Down the scanner. Figure 7-20 • Monitor does not display - Check AC circuit breaker - Verify power is present at monitor outlet - Check if video is present at backplane • Monitor display does not match with print out. - Verify factory default settings. Chapter 18 in the User Manual calls out suggested settings for various exam and lighting conditions. • Video test patterns are not clear, bright, parallel or square - Replace the monitor Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 35
[Page 214] 7-9-8 Unable to Record to VCR Unable to record to VCR! Is the VCR properly NO connected? YES Check that all signal, and power supply cable connections to the VCR unit are OK. Is the VCR tape put into NO the device? Put the tape into the device and rewind it. Is recording unable even NO by manual operation? - Check the signal cable connections between VCR and Internal I/O. - Check the cables between BEP and Internal I/O Replace VCR. Figure 7-21 VCR Troubleshooting 7 - 36 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 215] 7-9-9 Printer Troubleshooting Unable to use Printer(s)! Is the printer(s) properly NO connected? YES Check that all signal, and power supply cable connections between Printer and Scanner are OK. NO Are there print papers left? Insert the printer papers. Is proper configuration for NO the Print key(s) set? Configure the Print key(s). See next page. Figure 7-22 Printer Troubleshooting Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 37
[Page 216] 7-9-9 Printer Troubleshooting (cont’d) Still unable to use the Printer(s)! Is printing unavailable NO even by manual operation? YES Check the USB cables Between backplane and usb port. Is there an error message on the monitor display? NO Replace SOM module. Replace the Printer. Figure 7-23 Printer Troubleshooting (contd.) 7 - 38 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 217] 7-9-10 DVD-RW Troubleshooting Unable to record to CD-R or DVD -R! Is a new, unused CD-R NO disc inserted to the drive? Insert a new, un-used CD-R disc. Are CD-Rs rated at the proper write NO speed? Acquire CD-Rs rated at the proper write speed. Replace SOM Module. Figure 7-24 DVD Troubleshooting Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 39
[Page 218] 7-9-11 Network Troubleshooting 7-9-11-1 No Connection to the Network at All 1.) Check that the network cable between the scanner and the wall network is connected and well seated in both ends. 2.) Try a network cable that is known to be OK. 3.) Check the cable between the SYSCONML assy and P6 ARP assy. 4.) Connect a Crossed network cable between the Scanner and your PC. Try to ping from the scanner to the IP address on the PC. If OK, the hardware connection inside the scanner is OK. 7-9-11-2 No Contact With Server, But Connection to Network is OK Check Network setup on the scanner. 7 - 40 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 219] 7-9-11 Network Troubleshooting (cont’d) No Connection to the Network Is the TCP/IP Cable between NO LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro and network outlet connected and well Connect the cable and verify that it is well seated in both ends. Try a network cable that is known to be OK Is the connection OK now? NO Replace the AEXP cable between SYSCONML and P6 ARP assy Is the cable between SYSCONML asyand P6 NO APR Assy OK? Replace the P6 ARP assyl. Connect a Crossed Network Cable between the Scanner and your PC/ Laptop. Try to ping from the PC/Laptop to LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. If OK, the hardware connection inside LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro is OK. Figure 7-25 Network Troubleshooting Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7 - 41
[Page 220] This page was intentionally left blank. 7 - 42 Section 7-9 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 221] Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures Section 8-1 Overview 8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8 This chapter describes replacement procedures for the following modules and subsystems. Section Description Page Number 8-1 Overview 8-1 8-2 DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-2 8-3 Software Loading Procedure 8-103 8-4 Software Installation 8-111 8-5 Full Backup / Restore Procedure 8-140 8-6 Software Reloading 8-144 8-7 Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-154 8-8 Final Procedures 8-204 Table 8-1 Contents in Chapter 8 Section 8-1 - Overview 8 - 1
[Page 222] Section 8-2 DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY WARNING WARNING ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD REMOVE ANY COVERS OR PANELS. ELECTRICAL HAZARDS EXISTS AT SEVERAL POINTS INSIDE. BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENT LEVELS TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT CAUTION Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SERVICE OR DISASSEMBLE PARTS UNDER FRU UNIT LEVEL AT ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. 8 - 2 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 223] 8-2-1 17 Inch monitor cover set 8-2-1-1 Tools • Common pilIips screwdrivers • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-1-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the 17" LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-1 Removing the 17" LCD cable cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2306565, BH M4x16 WHT) to remove the power cord bracket assembled under the 17" LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-2 Removing the power cord bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 3
[Page 224] 3.) Disconnect power cable and DVI cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-3 Disconnecting power cable and DVI cable 4.) Unscrew 2 screws(5177684, HSH M5x20 WHT) to separate 17" LCD monitor. Refer to the figure Figure 8-4 Separating the 17" LCD monitor 5.) Unscrew 3 screws to remove the 17" LCD rear cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-5 Removing the 17" LCD rear cover 8 - 4 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 225] 6.) Unscrew 2 screws to remove the OSD key assy and disconnect the connect. Refer to the figure Figure 8-6 Separating the OSD key assy 7.) Separate the 17" LCD tact knob from the OSD key assy. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-7 Separating the 17" LCD tact knob Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 5
[Page 226] 8.) Unscrew 6 screws to remove 17" LCD front cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-8 Removing the 17" LCD front cover 9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-2 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-1. Equipment 8-2-1-3 Mounting Procedure Install the each of the new part in the reverse order of removal procedure. 8 - 6 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 227] 8-2-2 OSD button 8-2-2-1 Tools • L wrench • Philips screw driver 8-2-2-2 Preparation Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker 8-2-2-3 17" LCDMON OSD Key Assy Replace Procedure 1.) Remove the LCD Cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-9 Removing the LCD Cable cover 2.) Unscrew 4 screws to remove the rear cover.Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-10 Removing the rear cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 7
[Page 228] 8-2-2-3 17" LCDMON OSD Key Assy Replace Procedure (cont’d) 3.) Take the rear cover off using your hands. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-11 Rear Cover 4.) Unscrew 2 screws and remove OSD Key Assy from the front cover .Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-12 Removing the OSD Key Assy 5.) Disconnect the cable from OSD Key assy. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-13 Disconnecting the cable 8 - 8 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 229] 8-2-2-3 17" LCDMON OSD Key Assy Replace Procedure (cont’d) Table 8-3 Functional Tests 17" OSD Key Assy Function Validation 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-2. Equipment Section 4-6-2 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-2-4 Mounting Procedure Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 9
[Page 230] 8-2-3 17 INCH LCDMON ASSY 8-2-3-1 Tools • L wrench 8-2-3-2 Preparation • Shut down the system and switch off the main breaker 8-2-3-3 17" LCDMON ASSY Replace Procedure 1.) Remove the LCD Cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-14 Removing the LCD Cable Cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2306565,BH M4 x 16WHT) to remove the power code bracket assembled under the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-15 Removing the power code bracket 3.) Disconnect power and DVI cable. 8 - 10 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 231] 8-2-3-3 17" LCDMON ASSY Replace Procedure (cont’d) 4.) Unscrew 2 screw (GEPN:5177684, HSH M5X20WHT) and Remove Spring(GEPN:5177655). Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-16 Removing Spring 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-4 Functional Tests 17" LCDMON II Assy & LCD Panel with filter 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-3. Equipment Section 4-6-1 Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-3-4 Mounting Procedure Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 11
[Page 232] 8-2-4 New Articulation arm with cover installation Procedure 8-2-4-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-4-2 Preparations • Maneuver control console to a suitable position for removing the monitor. 8-2-4-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-17 Removing the LCD cable cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2306565, BH M4x16 WHT) to remove the power cord bracket assembled under the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-18 Removing the power cord bracket 8 - 12 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 233] 3.) Disconnect power cable and DVI cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-19 Disconnecting power cable and DVI cable 4.) Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Fold cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-20 Removing the Fold cover 5.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm cable cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-21 Removing the Arm cable cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 13
[Page 234] 6.) Unscrew 2 screws (5177684, HSH M5x20 WHT) to separate the LCD MONITOR and 1 screw (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Cable bracket. Refer to the figure below. NOTE: While unscrewing the hinge hexa screw from the arm, keep hold of the monitor to prevent dropping down. Figure 8-22 Separating the LCD monitor & Removing the Cable bracket 7.) Unscrew 2 screws (2337572, FH M3x6 WHT) to remove the Arm cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-23 Removing the Arm cover L & Arm cover R 8.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159632, BH M4x6 WHT) to remove the Cam cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-24 Removing the Cam cover L & Cam cover R 8 - 14 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 235] 9.) Unscrew 4 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm bottom cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-25 Removing the Arm bottom cover 10.)Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Lock cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-26 Removing the Lock cover 11.)Unscrew 2 screws (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Lower arm guide bracket. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-27 Removing the the Lower arm guide bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 15
[Page 236] 12.)Unscrew 2 screws (5257149, HSH M4X20) to remove the Arm stopper. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-28 Removing the Arm stopper 13.)Pull out power cable & DVI cable. Make sure flexible arm not to rotate. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-29 Pulling out power cable & DVI cable 14.)Unscrew 4 screws (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Lower cable bracket and pull out power cable & DVI cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-30 Unscrewing 4 screws 8 - 16 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 237] 15.)Unscrew 3 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) after removing the rubber caps to remove neck front cover, neck rear cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-31 Unscrewing 3 screws and removing the neck front cover & neck rear cover 16.)Unscrew 3 screws(5327646, HSH M6 X 16 WHT) to separate the flexible arm neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-32 Separating the neck pipe Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 17
[Page 238] 17.)Unscrew 1 screw (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the OP bracket. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-33 Removing OP bracket 18.)Unscrew 3 screws (2373562, FH M4x10 YEL) to separate the Flexible arm stopper(A+B). Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-34 Separating the flexible arm stopper 8 - 18 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 239] 19.)Pull out power cable & DVI cable and remove the oilless bush after separating the neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-35 Pulling out power cable & DVI cable and removing the stopper Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 19
[Page 240] 20.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-5 Functional Tests New articulation arm with cover Function 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-4. Equipment Section 4-8-6 Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-4-4 Assembly procedure 1.) Insert two of the flexible arm stoppers (A+B) to the Power Cable and DVI cable in the Order illustrated on the figure below. Make sure that chamfered shape of the flexible Arm stopper should face inside. Refer to the figure below. Flexible Arm Stopper Figure 8-36 Inserting cables to the flexible arm stopper 2.) Insert oilless bush into the flexible arm neck pipe and insert two cables into the flexible arm neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-37 Inserting the oilless bush 8 - 20 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 241] 3.) Insert the flexible arm into the flexible arm neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-38 Inserting the flexible arm 4.) Screw 3 screws (2373562, FH M4X10 YEL) to fix the flexible arm stopper after adjusting the holes. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-39 Fixing the flexible arm stopper 5.) Screw 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to install OP bracket. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-40 Installing OP Bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 21
[Page 242] 6.) Screw 3 screws (5327646, HSH M6 X 16 WHT) to install the arm neck pipe. Make sure place DVI cable be on the right side, power cable on the left side. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-41 Assembling the arm neck pipe 7.) Screw 2 screws (5177684, HSH M5X20 WHT) to assemble the LCD monitor with flexible arm Top part. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-42 Screwing 2 screws 8.) Insert the two cables inside the Flexible arm and Screw 4 screws (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lower arm cable bracket. Figure 8-43 Screwing 4 screws 8 - 22 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 243] 9.) Put in the two cables. Refer to the figure below. Make sure place DVI cable be on the right side, power cable on the left side. Figure 8-44 Putting in the cables 10.)Screw 2 screws (5257149, HSH M4X20) to assemble the Arm stopper. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-45 Installing the Arm stopper 11.)Screw 2 screws (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lower arm guide bracket.Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-46 Assembling the Lower arm guide bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 23
[Page 244] 12.)Tie the Cables with Cable tie. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-47 Tying the cables 13.)Place the cables inside the slot and connect power cable and DVI cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-48 Placing the Cables 14.)Assemble the cable bracket with 1 Screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP). Figure 8-49 Assembling the Cable bracket 8 - 24 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 245] 15.)Screw 2 screws (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) to assemble the Arm Cable Cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-50 Assembling the Arm Cable Cover 16.)Place the cables like the figure below. Figure 8-51 Placing the cables 17.)Screw 1 screw (2306565, BH M4X16 WHT) to fix the Power cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-52 Assembling the power cord bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 25
[Page 246] 18.)Assemble the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-53 Assembling the LCD cable cover 8 - 26 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 247] 19.)Screw 3 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) after placing the neck front cover and neck Rear cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-54 Assembling the neck front cover and the neck rear cover 20.)Screw 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lock Knob. Figure 8-55 Assembling the Lock Knob Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 27
[Page 248] 21.)Screw 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to assemble the Lock Cover. Figure 8-56 Assembling the Lock Cover 8 - 28 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 249] 22.)Screw 2 screws (2159632, BH M4X6 WHT) to assemble the Cam Cover L & R. Figure 8-57 Assembling the Cam Cover L & R 23.)Screw 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to assemble the Fold Cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-58 Assembling the Fold Cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 29
[Page 250] 24.)Screw 2 screws (2337572, FH M3X6 WHT) to assemble the Arm cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-59 Assembling the Arm Cover L & R 25.)Screw 4 screws (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) to assemble the Arm bottom Cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-60 Assembling the Arm bottom cover 8 - 30 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 251] 26.)Completed picture of the Flexible Arm. Figure 8-61 Flexible Arm Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 31
[Page 252] 8-2-5 New Articulation cover set installation Procedure 8-2-5-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-5-2 Preparations • Maneuver control console to a suitable position for removing the monitor. 8-2-5-3 Removal procedure 1.) ARM COVER L & R Unscrew 2 screws (2337572, FH M3x6 WHT) to remove the Arm cover L & R. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-62 Removing the Arm cover L & Arm cover R 2.) ARM CAM COVER L & R Unscrew 2 screws (2159632, BH M4x6 WHT) to remove the Arm cam cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-63 Removing the Arm cam cover L & Arm cam cover R 8 - 32 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 253] 3.) ARM BOTTOM COVER Unscrew 4 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm bottom cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-64 Removing the Arm bottom cover 4.) ARM CABLE COVER Unscrew 2 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm cable cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-65 Removing the Arm cable cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 33
[Page 254] 5.) ARM LOCK COVER Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4x16) to remove the Arm lock cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-66 Removing the Arm lock cover 6.) ARM LOCK KNOB 1.) Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4x16) to remove the Arm lock cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-67 Removing the Arm lock cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to remove the Arm lock Knob. Figure 8-68 Removing the Arm lock Knob 8 - 34 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 255] 7.) ARM FOLD COVER Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Arm fold cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-69 Removing the Arm fold cover 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-6 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-5. Equipment 8-2-5-4 Mounting procedure Install the each of the new part in the reverse order of removal procedure. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 35
[Page 256] 8-2-6 Main Keyboard Assy 8-2-6-1 Tools 8-2-6-2 Preparations 8-2-6-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the 3 Probe holders & Cup holder from the keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-70. Figure 8-70 Removing holders 2.) Unscrew 4 screws from the bottom front of the keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-71. (1) (4) (2) (3) Figure 8-71 Unscrews 4 screws 8 - 36 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 257] 8-2-6-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 3.) Unscrew 2 screws from the rear side of the keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-72. (1) (2) Figure 8-72 Unscrews 2 screws 4.) Lift the top cover of the keyboard and disconnect 4 cables from the keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-73. Figure 8-73 Lifting the top cover & Disconnecting 5 Cables 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-7 Functional Tests Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Section 4-7-1 “Service Manual, Direction Procedure 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-6. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-6-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 37
[Page 258] 8-2-7 Sub Keyboard Assy 8-2-7-1 Tools 8-2-7-2 Preparations 8-2-7-3 Removal procedure 2.) Unscrew 4 screws. 2 screws(1,3) are back of the speaker enclosures, and 2 screws(2,4) are bttom of sub keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-74. Figure 8-74 4 Screw Sub Keyboard Assy Table 8-8 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-7. Equipment Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Section 4-7-2 Procedure 8-2-7-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 38 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 259] 8-2-8 Trackball Assy 8-2-8-1 Tools 8-2-8-2 Preparations 8-2-8-3 Removal procedure connector 4 screws Figure 8-75 Screws and connector for Trackball 2.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4) and disconnect the cable. Refer to the Figure 8-75. Table 8-9 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-8. Equipment Section 4-7-3 Trackball Assy validation 8-2-8-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 39
[Page 260] 8-2-9 English, Greek, Russian, Swedish, Norweigian A/N Key assy 8-2-9-1 Tools 8-2-9-2 Preparations 8-2-9-3 Removal procedure Figure 8-76 A/N Key in keboard 2.) Remove USB PCB by unscrewing 6 screws (1-6) and disconnecting the 6 cables. Refer to the Figure 8-77. Connectors 1 ~ 3 Connector 3 4~ 6 Figure 8-77 USB PCB 8 - 40 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 261] 8-2-9-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 3.) Unscrew 6 screws from the back side of the A/N key assy. Refer to the Figure 8-78. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 8-78 Screws on the A/N Key Table 8-10 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-9. Equipment Section 4-7-4 A/N Key assy validation 8-2-9-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 41
[Page 262] 8-2-10 Freeze key assy 8-2-10-1 Tools 8-2-10-2 Preparations 8-2-10-3 Removal procedure Figure 8-79 Freeze Key in the main keyboard 2.) Remove the 3 screws (1-3) and disconnect 1 cable. Refer to the figure below. 1 2 connector Figure 8-80 Freeze Key connector Table 8-11 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-10. Equipment Section 4-7-5 Freeze key validation 8-2-10-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 42 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 263] 8-2-11 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set 8-2-11-1 Tools 8-2-11-2 Preparations 8-2-11-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the CFUNCKEY Assy. Refer to the 8-2-6 "Main Keyboard Assy" on page 8-36. 2.) Remove the TGC Knobs. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-81 8 TGC Knobs 3.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4). Refer to figure below. 1 2 3 4 Figure 8-82 TGC PCB Assy in Keyboard Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 43
[Page 264] 8-2-11-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Disconnect 1 connector from the PCB. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-83 TGC Key Connector 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-12 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-11. Equipment Section 4-7-6 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set validation 8-2-11-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 44 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 265] 8-2-12 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set 8-2-12-1 Tools 8-2-12-2 Preparations 8-2-12-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove all the Endoder Knobs from the keyboard. Figure 8-84 Knob in Sub Keyboard Table 8-13 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-12. Equipment Section 4-7-7 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set validation 8-2-12-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 45
[Page 266] 8-2-13 Keycap set, Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set 8-2-13-1 Tools 8-2-13-2 Preparations 8-2-13-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove key caps from the keyboard. Figure 8-85 Key Caps Table 8-14 Functional Tests TGC key assy/TGC Knob set, Sub keyboard encoder Knob Set, keycap set, Main keyboard 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-13. Equipment Section 4-8-3 Encoder Knob set Function Validation passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Procedure 8-2-13-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 46 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 267] 8-2-14 Right or Left Side Cover 8-2-14-1 Tools 8-2-14-2 Preparations 8-2-14-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew the four screws on left and right side. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-86 2 screw on side cover 2.) Remove the Right or Left side covers. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-87 Open side cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 47
[Page 268] Table 8-15 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-14. Equipment 8-2-14-4 Mounting Procedure Install the new part(s) in the reverse order of removal. 8 - 48 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 269] 8-2-15 Front Cover 8-2-15-1 Tools 8-2-15-2 Preparations 8-2-15-3 Removal procedure 2.) Remove the dummy left and right covers. Refer to the Figure 8-88. Figure 8-88 Screws of Dummy Cover 3.) Remove the two screws on each side of the back of the front cover. Figure 8-89 Screws of the front cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 49
[Page 270] 8-2-15-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Pull the front cover forwards. Figure 8-90 Removal of front cover 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-16 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-15. Equipment 8-2-15-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 50 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 271] 8-2-16 Rear Cover 8-2-16-1 Tools 8-2-16-2 Preparations • Shut down the system, and switch off the main breaker. 8-2-16-3 Removal procedure 2.) Remove 4 rubber caps and the 4 screws from the rear cover. Refer to the figure below.(. Figure 8-91 4 rubber caps and 4screws on Rear Cover 3.) Remove the Rear Cover. Table 8-17 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-16. Equipment 8-2-16-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 51
[Page 272] 8-2-17 Middle Cover 8-2-17-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-17-2 Preparations 8-2-17-3 Removal procedure 2.) And remove the Rear Cover. Refer to the 8-2-16 "Rear Cover" on page 8-51. 3.) Remove 2 rubber caps and the two screws from the otp of the middle cover of the system. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-92 2 rubber cap of middle cover Table 8-18 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-17. Equipment 8-2-17-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 52 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 273] 8-2-18 Top Cover 8-2-18-1 Tools 8-2-18-2 Preparations 8-2-18-3 Removal procedure 2.) Remove the Top Buttom Cover. Refer to the 8-2-19 "Top Bottom Cover" on page 8-54. 3.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2) from the top cover of the system and unscrew 2 screws (1-2). Refer to the figure below. (1) (2) Figure 8-93 2 rubber caps of top cover 4.) Unscrew 5 screws (1-5) from the bottom of the top cover. 5.) Remove the Top Cover. Table 8-19 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-18. Equipment 8-2-18-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 53
[Page 274] 8-2-19 Top Bottom Cover 8-2-19-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-19-2 Preparations 8-2-19-3 Removal procedure 2.) Unscrew 7 screws (1-7) from the bottom of the top cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-94 Top bottom cover 3.) Remove the Top Buttom Cover. Table 8-20 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-19. Equipment 8-2-19-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 54 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 275] 8-2-20 Pole Cover 8-2-20-1 Tools 8-2-20-2 Preparations 8-2-20-3 Removal procedure 2.) Remove the Top Buttom Cover. Refer to the 8-2-19 "Top Bottom Cover" on page 8-54. 3.) Remove the Top Cover. Refer to the 8-2-18 "Top Cover" on page 8-53. 4.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2). Refer to the figure below. (1) (2) Figure 8-95 Pole Cover 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-21 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-20. Equipment 8-2-20-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 55
[Page 276] 8-2-21 Neck Front 8-2-21-1 Tools 8-2-21-2 Preparations 8-2-21-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove 1 rubber cap. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-96 rubber cap of neck front cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw and remove the Neck Front. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-97 Open neck front cover 8 - 56 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 277] 8-2-21-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-22 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-21. Equipment 8-2-21-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 57
[Page 278] 8-2-22 Neck Rear 8-2-22-1 Tools 8-2-22-2 Preparations 8-2-22-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2). Refer to the figure below. (2) (1) Figure 8-98 rubber cap of neck rear cover 2.) Unscrew 2 screws and remove the Neck Rear. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-99 Open neck rear cover 8 - 58 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 279] 8-2-22-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-23 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-22. Equipment 8-2-22-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 59
[Page 280] 8-2-23 Dummy Cover L / R 8-2-23-1 Tools 8-2-23-2 Preparations 8-2-23-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2). Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-100 rubber cap of dummy cover 2.) Unscrew 2 screws and remove the dummy cover L. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-101 screws of dummy cover 3.) Same process is applied for dummy cover R. 8 - 60 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 281] 8-2-23-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-24 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-23. Equipment 8-2-23-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 61
[Page 282] 8-2-24 EMI Cover L and R 8-2-24-1 Tools 8-2-24-2 Preparations 8-2-24-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Side Left Cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47 2.) Unscrew the 6 screws on left EML cover and 9 screws on thr right EMI cover. Refer to the Figure 8-102. Figure 8-102 EMI Cover Land R Table 8-25 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-24. Equipment 8-2-24-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 62 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 283] 8-2-25 APS II Assy NOTE: APS Power Supply can not be adjusted. 8-2-25-1 Tools • Nipper 8-2-25-2 Preparations 8-2-25-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Side Left Cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 2.) Remove the EMI Cover L. Refer to the 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. 3.) Remove HDD power cable. 4.) Extract 3 power connector from back plane. 5.) Disconnect the AC input connector. AC Input Connector Figure 8-103 APS IIConnectors of backplane 6.) Remove the Side Right Cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 7.) Remove the EMI Cover R. Refer to the 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 63
[Page 284] 8-2-25-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 8.) Unplug the J14 connector, and unscrew 2 screws. Pull out the APS II Assy carefully. Note: AC power input connector should be passed through the square hole on shassis bottom. Refer to the Figure 8-104. Figure 8-104 Pull out the APS Assy 9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-26 Functional Tests APS II Assy PCB Function Validation Section 4-9-5 Procedure 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-25. Equipment 8-2-25-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 64 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 285] 8-2-26 DTRX64II Assy 8-2-26-1 Tools 8-2-26-2 Preparations 8-2-26-3 Removal procedure 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and eject the PCB. Refer to the Figure 8-105. Figure 8-105 Eject RFC Assy 4.) The DTRX64II Assys are settled in #1 and #2 slots in nest box. 5.) Pull the DTRX64II assy(s) out. Refer to the Figure 8-106. Figure 8-106 DTRX64II Assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 65
[Page 286] 8-2-26-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-27 Functional Tests Section 4-9-2 DTRX64II Assy Function Validation Procedure “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-26. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-26-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 66 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 287] 8-2-27 P3RLY/PI128II Assy 8-2-27-1 Tools 8-2-27-2 Preparations 8-2-27-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the side left and right covers. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47.. 2.) Remove the Front Cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Front Cover" on page 8-49. 3.) Remove the RFC Assy. Refer to the 8-2-32 "RFC Assy" on page 8-77. 4.) Unscrew 8 screws (1-8) and remove the metal cover. Refer to the Figure 8-107. Figure 8-107 P3RLY/PI128II Cover 5.) Unscrew 6 screws (1~6, white arrow marked). Refer to the Figure 8-108. Figure 8-108 P3RLY/PI128II Assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 67
[Page 288] 8-2-27-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-28 Functional Tests Section 4-9-1 PI128II Assy function check procedure Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-27. Equipment Section 10-5-7 Probe Maintenance 8-2-27-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 68 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 289] 8-2-28 BP128 Assy 8-2-28-1 Tools 8-2-28-2 Preparations 8-2-28-3 Removal procedure 1.) To replace the BP128 assy, all PWAs should be removed from the nest box. 2.) Open the Side Left Cover and Side Right Cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 3.) Open the EMI Cover L and EMI Cover R. Refer to the 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. 4.) Remove all PWAs from the nest box. Refer to the Figure 8-109. Figure 8-109 PWAs in the nest box 5.) Open the front cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Front Cover" on page 8-49. 6.) Remove the P3RLY/PI128II Board. Refer to the 8-2-27 "P3RLY/PI128II Assy" on page 8-67. 7.) Remove the HDD. Refer to the 8-2-43 "SATA HDD Assy" on page 8-92. 8.) Unplug all the cable connectors all in BP128 Assy. 9.) Remove a bracket (1) by looseing 2 screws.Refet to Figure 8-110 "BP128 Assy" on page 8-70. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 69
[Page 290] 8-2-28-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 10.) Unscrews 13 screws to remove back plane from nest box. Refer to the Figure 8-110. Figure 8-110 BP128 Assy 11.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-29 Functional Tests Section 4-9-8 BP128 Assy Function Validation Procedure “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-28. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-28-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 70 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 291] 8-2-29 CWD64 Assy 8-2-29-1 Tools 8-2-29-2 Preparations 8-2-29-3 Removal procedure 3.) Remove the RFC Assy. Refer to the 8-2-32 "RFC Assy" on page 8-77. 4.) Disconnects the CWD64 cable. 5.) Pull out the CWD64 Assy located in #3 from Nest box. Refer to the Figure 8-111. CWD64 cable CWD64 Assy Figure 8-111 CWD64 Assy Table 8-30 Functional Tests Section 4-9-3 CWD64 Assy Function Validation Procedure “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-29. Equipment System CFM and PWD Checks Section 4-3-5 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-29-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 71
[Page 292] 8-2-30 SYSCONML Assy 8-2-30-1 Tools 8-2-30-2 Preparations 8-2-30-3 Removal procedure 3.) Disconnect the AEXP cable. Refer to the Figure 8-112. 4.) Remove the SYSCONML Assy in slot #4 in the nest box. SYSCONML Assy AEXP cable Figure 8-112 SYSCONML Assy 5.) Eject ane ASIR ROM from old SYSCONML with regular screw driver. Refer to the Figure 8-113. Seperate ASIR ROM form new SYSCONML as same procedure. Figure 8-113 ASIR location 8 - 72 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 293] 8-2-30-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Figure 8-114 Seperation of ASIR ROM 6.) Mount ASIR ROM to new SYSCONML Assy. Refer to the Figure 8-115. 7.) Confirm mounting direction and pin number. Figure 8-115 ASIR ROM mounting direction NOTE: It is important to swap ASIR ROM(U23). Because it contains the serial Number and option the system. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 73
[Page 294] 8-2-30-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-31 Functional Tests SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Section 4-9-4 Procedure Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks Section 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-30. Equipment Section 4-5 Peripheral Checks 8-2-30-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 74 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 295] 8-2-31 SOM Replacement 8-2-31-1 Tools 8-2-31-2 Preparations 8-2-31-3 Removal procedure 3.) Remove the SYSCOMML Assy. Refer to the 8-2-30 "SYSCONML Assy" on page 8-72. 4.) Unscrews 4 screws. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-116 4 screws for SOM on SYSCON 5.) Remove the SOM Assy. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-117 Remove a SOM from SYSCONML Assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 75
[Page 296] 8-2-31-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-32 Functional Tests Section 4-9-6 SOM Function Validation Procedure Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks Section 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-31. Equipment Section 4-5 Peripheral Checks 8-2-31-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 76 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 297] 8-2-32 RFC Assy 8-2-32-1 Tools 8-2-32-2 Preparations 8-2-32-3 Removal procedure 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1,2) and eject the PCB. Refer to the Figure 8-118. Figure 8-118 RFC Assy Table 8-33 Functional Tests Section 4-9-7 RFC Assy Function Validation Procedure “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-32. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-32-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 77
[Page 298] 8-2-33 Front Caster / Rear Caster NOTE: Both Front Casters and Rear Casters are swivel type in LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. 8-2-33-1 Tools 8-2-33-2 Preparations 8-2-33-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 8 screws (1A-8A) to remove the front caster. Refer to the figure below. 2.) Unscrew 8 screws (1-8) to remove the rear caster. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-119 Casters 8 - 78 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 299] 8-2-33-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-34 Functional Tests Front caster/Rear caster Function Validation 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-33. Equipment Section 4-8-5 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-33-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 79
[Page 300] 8-2-34 Rear Handle 8-2-34-1 Tools 8-2-34-2 Preparations 8-2-34-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 1 screw. Remove the Handle Dumy brkt. Figure 8-120 Handle Dummy Bracket 2.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) from the back of the rear handle. Refer to the Figure 8-121. (1) (2) Figure 8-121 Rear Handle Table 8-35 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-34. Equipment 8-2-34-4 Mounting Procedure 8 - 80 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 301] 8-2-35 Rear Hook 8-2-35-1 Tools 8-2-35-2 Preparations 8-2-35-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove Rear hook. Figure 8-122 Screws on rear hook 2.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove. Figure 8-123 Screws on the rear hook fix brkt Table 8-36 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-35. Equipment 8-2-35-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 81
[Page 302] 8-2-36 Probe Holder 8-2-36-1 Tools 8-2-36-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the probe holders from the Keyboard. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-124 Probe Holders Table 8-37 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-36. Equipment 8-2-36-3 Mounting Procedure 8 - 82 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 303] 8-2-37 Cup Holder 8-2-37-1 Tools 8-2-37-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the cup holder. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-125 Cup holder Table 8-38 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-37. Equipment Section 4-8-4 Cup holder Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-37-3 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 83
[Page 304] 8-2-38 ECG Cable Hook 8-2-38-1 Tools 8-2-38-2 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) to remove the ECG Cable Hook. Refer to the Figure 8-126. (1) (2) Figure 8-126 Cable hook on the bottom of keyboard Table 8-39 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-38. Equipment Cover Parts Function Validation Section 4-8-1 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-38-3 Mounting Procedure 8 - 84 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 305] 8-2-39 Air Filter Set 8-2-39-1 Tools 8-2-39-2 Preparations 8-2-39-3 Removal procedure 1.) Pull out the 2 Air filters from the bottom left and right side of the trans box. Refer to the Figure 8-127. Air filters View from the foot rest Figure 8-127 Air filters Table 8-40 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-39. Equipment Section 4-8-2 Air filter set Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-39-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 85
[Page 306] 8-2-40 DVD R/W Drive 8-2-40-1 Tools • Clock screw driver 8-2-40-2 Preparations 8-2-40-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the side Left and Right covers. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 2.) Remove EMI Left cover. Refer to the 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. 3.) Remove the HDD assy. Refer to the 8-2-43 "SATA HDD Assy" on page 8-92. 4.) Disconnect ODD SATA Power Cable and SATA Cable. From DVD Drive. Refer to the Figure 8-128. SATA Cable ODD SATA Power Cable Figure 8-128 ODD SATA Power Cable and SATA cable of DVD Drive 5.) Remove the Front Cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Front Cover" on page 8-49. 6.) Unscrew the 4 screws on the front of the DVD drive and remove the DVD Assy. Refer to the Figure 8-129. Figure 8-129 Unscrew 4screws and remove the DVD Assy 8 - 86 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 307] 8-2-40-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 7.) Unscrew 8 screws to remove the bracket from the DVD Assy. Refer to the Figure 8-130. Figure 8-130 Unscrew 8screws and remove the DVD Drive from the bracket 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-41 Functional Tests Section 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-40. Equipment Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-40-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 87
[Page 308] 8-2-41 NEST FAN Assy 8-2-41-1 Tools 8-2-41-2 Preparations 8-2-41-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Left and Right Covers. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 2.) Remove the EMI Right and Left covers. Refer to the 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. 3.) Cut the cable tie, and unplug the ‘FAN’ connector. Refer to the Figure 8-131. Figure 8-131 Connector and Screw2 screws on the Nest Fan 4.) Unscrews the two screws. Refer to the Figure 8-132. 5.) Pull out the FAN assy forward from the nest. Refer to the Figure 8-132. Figure 8-132 Pull out the nest fan 8 - 88 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 309] 8-2-41-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-42 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-41. Equipment Section 4-9-9 Nest fan Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-41-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 89
[Page 310] 8-2-42 ARP II Assy 110V/220V 8-2-42-1 Tools 8-2-42-2 Preparations 8-2-42-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove side right cover and EMI cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8- 47 and 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. 2.) Remove the Rear Cover. Refer to the 8-2-16 "Rear Cover" on page 8-51. 3.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4). Refer to the Figure 8-133. (1) (2) (3) (4) Figure 8-133 Screws of the rear panel 4.) Disconnect J15 connector. Refer to the Figure 8-134. Figure 8-134 AEXP Cable of rear panel 8 - 90 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 311] 8-2-42-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Disconnect three (3) USB connectors or 5 USB connectors from the rear panel and 2 AC power connector. The 4D controller USB and ECG USB connector also connect to this rear paenl PWA. Refer to the Figure 8-135. Figure 8-135 Open Rear Panel Table 8-43 Functional Tests Section 4-9-15 ARPII Assy Function Validation Procedure Section 4-5 Peripheral Checks 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-42. Equipment Section 10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Section 10-5-5 Probe Maintenance Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Section 10-6-3 Canada 8-2-42-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 91
[Page 312] 8-2-43 SATA HDD Assy 8-2-43-1 Tools • Cutter 8-2-43-2 Preparations 8-2-43-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the side left cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 2.) Remove EMI L Cover. Refer to the 8-2-24 "EMI Cover L and R" on page 8-62. 3.) Disconnect HDD power cable and unscrew 4 screws of the HDD fixture bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-136. HDD Power Cable Figure 8-136 HDD in System 4.) Disconnect the SATA cable from the backplane on the bottom of backplane. NOTE: Push inside of latch that is ejector button on the SATA connector, and pull out the cable smoothly. This connector is a locking type. Figure 8-137 Disconnect the SATA Cable 8 - 92 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 313] 8-2-43-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Disconnect the SATA Power Cable and SATA Cable from HDD Assy after removing 2ea cable ties. And unscrew 4screws to remove the HDD Fixture bracket. Cable Ties Figure 8-138 Separate HDD and HDD Fixture Bracket Table 8-44 Functional Tests Section 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-43. Equipment Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-43-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 93
[Page 314] 8-2-44 ACPC II Assy 8-2-44-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-44-2 Preparations 8-2-44-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the AC Input Box Assy. Refer to the 8-2-42 "ARP II Assy 110V/220V" on page 8-90. 2.) Disconnect 5 connectors. Refer to the Figure 8-139. Figure 8-139 ACPC in Transbox 3.) Unscrew 5 screws to remove the ACPC Assy. Refer to the Figure 8-140. Figure 8-140 Screws of ACPC assy 8 - 94 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 315] 8-2-44-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-45 Functional Tests ACPC II Assy set Function Validation Section 4-9-12 Procedure Section 10-5-5 Probe Maintenance Section 10-6-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-44. Equipment Section 10-6-3 Canada passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Section 10-6-4 Grounding Continuity Section 10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-6 to Ground Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-7 to Lead Section 10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 8-2-44-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 95
[Page 316] 8-2-45 AP950 Assy 8-2-45-1 Tools 8-2-45-2 Preparations 8-2-45-3 Removal procedure - To detache the AC Power assy, All open 4 pcs console cover that are left, right, front, rear cover. 1.) Remove side left cover and right side cover. Refer to the 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47 and 8-2-14 "Right or Left Side Cover" on page 8-47. 2.) Remove rear side cover and front cover. Refet to the 8-2-15 "Front Cover" on page 8-49 and 8-2- 16 "Rear Cover" on page 8-51. 3.) Unscrew 2 M4 screws and 2 Hexa screws on the front of AC trans box.Refer to the Figure 8-141. Figure 8-141 4 screw on the front of the AC TRANSBOX 4.) Loosen 2 Hex (left side in Figure 8-144)screws and 4 M4 screws (right side of Figure 8-142). Figure 8-142 Back of the AC TRANSBOX 8 - 96 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 317] 8-2-45-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Disconnect the four connectors form TRANSBOX in Figure 8-143. Figure 8-143 Connectors 6.) Pull out TRANSBOX forwards. Figure 8-144 Pull out the Transbox assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 97
[Page 318] 8-2-45-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-46 Functional Tests Section 4-9-10 Transbox/ Fan Function Validation Procedure Section 10-5-3 Input Power Section 10-5-5 Probe Maintenance Section 10-6-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits “Service Manual, Direction 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-45. Equipment Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Section 10-6-3 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Canada Section 10-6-4 Grounding Continuity Section 10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-6 to Ground Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-7 to Lead Section 10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 8-2-45-4 Mounting Procedure When install Transbox assy, the transbox chassie should be inserted into the guide rails which are under the frame chassi. Figure 8-145 Insert the Transbox assy 8 - 98 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 319] 8-2-46 Fuse Set 8-2-46-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-46-2 Preparations 8-2-46-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the AC Transbox assy. Refer to the 8-2-42 "ARP II Assy 110V/220V" on page 8-90. 2.) Replace the 2 fuses located on the ACPC II assy in the transbox assy. Refer to the Figure 8-146. Figure 8-146 FUSE in Transbox(AP950) assy Table 8-47 Functional Tests 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-2-46. Equipment Section 4-9-14 Fuse set Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-46-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 99
[Page 320] 8-2-47 Read and Write Serial Info 8-2-47-1 How to start serial no read/write program 1.) Plug the service dongle on the usb port on rear panel. 2.) Turn on the system. 3.) When the Start Application dialog box appears, press [F2] before it automatically starts Echoloader.) NOTE: If maintenance access box does not appear and the scanning mode starts, just insert the Service Dongle and press “CTRL+ALT+R”. Figure 8-147 Start Appllication Dialog Box 4.) When the Maintenance Access dialog box pops up, type in the service password. Figure 8-148 Maintenance Access Dialog Box 8 - 100 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 321] 8-2-47-1 How to start serial no read/write program (cont’d) 5.) If the win XP screen appears, run the window explorer. Move the cursor to bottom of the screen. If the task bas appear, click the explorer icon. Figure 8-149 Window Explorer on OS screen 6.) Run the "asn.exe" by double click . This execution file is in "C:\Arirang\target\bin" directory Figure 8-150 “asn.exe” 7.) When asn.exe starts running, Logon windows pops up. Type in maintenance password to start asn.exe. Figure 8-151 Execute the “ASN.EXE” Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8 - 101
[Page 322] 8-2-47-2 How to read Serial No 1.) Check checkboxes of system boards you want to read or System Serial No checkbox. NOTE: You can read System Serial No, L2SYSCON board, DTRX64II_L board, DTRX64II_R board, PI128II board and CWD board information. Figure 8-152 Reading System Info 8-2-47-3 How to write info on the system 1.) Check checkboxes of system boards you want to write or System Serial No checkbox. 2.) Put the Serial No, Part No, or Rev on the blacnk box. 3.) Press “Write” Button. 8 - 102 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 323] Section 8-3 Software Loading Procedure 8-3-1 General This describes a full system software loading (Base Software Load Image + Arirang Application Load Image) procedure. Use this instruction when: - Performing the HDD with new one (Base Software Load Image + Arirang Application Load Image) - Performing the system revision-up (Application) 8-3-2 Parts Required LOGIQ P6 Base Software DVD LOGIQ P6 Application Software DVD Blank CD-Rs ( for patient image backup) or DVDs Service Dongle NOTE: Patient Image Data will be deleted when all the drives are ghosted. Back up them on the CD-R or DVD before starting software loading NOTE: Insert the service dongle into ths service port located at the rear panel before installing the Base System Software Load image 8-3-3 TimeRequired Approximately 2hours Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8 - 103
[Page 324] 8-3-4 Software Loading Steering Guide Figure 8-153 Flow Chart - Installation of Base and Application CD 8 - 104 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 325] 8-3-5 Before Starting Software Loading 8-3-5-1 Saving Connectivity Before starting upgrade, write down the Connectivity Setting for back-up. 1.) Go to Utility > Connectivity and click the TCP/IP tab. 2.) Write down the following parameters:. Parameters Descriptions (Entry for Stand-Alone System) Computer Name Enable DHCP IP-Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Note : For a stand-alone system, preset values of IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway, shown above, must entered. Figure 8-154 Connectivity Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8 - 105
[Page 326] 8-3-5-2 Image Management Guide NOTE: Before upgrade to R2.x.x software, perform recommended image backup procedure. Export/Import Data/Images Between Systems - Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from one system to another. To move exams from one Ultrasound system to another, you need to export/import exam information. NOTE: Both database information and images are exported. No data is deleted from the local archive when exporting data. Exporting Data To export an exam(s) to a compatible Ultrasound system: 1.) Format the removable media (DVD or CD-ROM). Label the removable media. Answer Yes/OK to the messages.Press Patient. Deselect any selected patient(s) in the search portion of the Patient screen. Press Data Transfer (located at the upper, right-hand corner of the Patient menu). Figure 8-155 Exam Data Transfer 2.) Select Export task Button. Figure 8-156 Task button 8 - 106 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 327] 3.) The [From] combo box is not active. It displays Local Archive. The [To] combo box is active. Select the type of removable media CD/DVD. Then please wait until the patient list is visible. Figure 8-157 To Combo Box 4.) In the patient list at the top of the Patient menu, select the patient(s) you want to export. You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient. To select a consecutive list of patients, click the cursor on the first name, move the cursor to the last name, then press and hold down the Shift+right Set key to select all the names.To select a non-consecutive list of patients, click the cursor at the first name, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key again, etc.You can also search for patients via the Search key and string. Or, Select All Button from the Patient Menu: Figure 8-158 Source Section NOTE: You need to use your best judgment when moving patients' images. If there are lots of images or loops, then only move a few patients at a time. 5.) Once you have selected all of the patients to export, press Transfer Button as shown in Figure 8-158 on page 107 from the Patient Menu. Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8 - 107
[Page 328] 6.) The progress bar appears as the copy is taking place. Once transfer completed, the exported patient list will be shown as Figure 8-159. Figure 8-159 Destination Section of Patient Screen 7.) Press F3 to eject the media. Specify that you want to finalize the CD-ROM or DVD. 8 - 108 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 329] Importing Data To import an exam(s) to another Ultrasound system: 1.) At the other Ultrasound system, insert the CD-ROM/DVD. 2.) Press Patient. Press Exam Data Transfer (located at the upper, left-hand corner of the Patient menu).. Figure 8-160 Exam Data Trnasfer 3.) Select Import task Button. Figure 8-161 Task button Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8 - 109
[Page 330] 4.) The [TO] combo box is not active. It displays Local Archive. The [FROM] combo box is active. Select the type of removable media CD/DVD Rom. Then please wait until the patient list is visible. Figure 8-162 Removable Media 5.) The Patient menu just shows the patients available for import from the removable media you just loaded onto the system. 6.) Select the patients to be imported. 7.) Once you have selected all of the patients to import, press Transfer Button. 8.) Please wait for the patient information to be copied to this Ultrasound system. Progress bar appears while the import is taking place. 8 - 110 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 331] Section 8-4Software Installation 8-4-1 Installing Base Image Software NOTE: While we do not believe it is necessary, It would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers. NOTE: All digital peripherals, reporting systems connected via the USB ports should be either power off or disconnected prior to the software installation 1.) Power ON the scanner. 2.) Tap gently the DEL key until the following screen appears.Enter “ arirang” as a password if the system request a password, then press the Enter key. Figure 8-163 Enter Current Password 3.) Move to Advanced and select IDE Configuration . Figure 8-164 IDE Configuration Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 111
[Page 332] 4.) If the BIOS setting value in Primary IDE Slave is ATAPI CDROM , the 1st Boot Device in Boot menu should be Primary Slave . If the 1st Boot Device is not Primary Slave, please change the setting value using Enter key and Arrow key. Figure 8-165 Boot Device Priority 5.) If the BIOS setting value in Secondary IDE Master is ATAPI CDROM , the 1st Boot Device in Boot menu should be Secondary Master . If the 1st Boot Device is not Secondary Master, please change the setting value using Enter key and Arrow key. Figure 8-166 IDE Configuration 8 - 112 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 333] Figure 8-167 Boot Device Priority 6.) Insert the BT09 Base Image Software Disk into the CD/DVD ROM drive. 7.) After restarting the system, the following screen will be displayed. Figure 8-168 Installation Warning Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 113
[Page 334] 8.) Press Enter key and then the following screen will be shown. (If you want to abort installation procedures, press CTRL+C.) Figure 8-169 Base Image Software Installation Menu 9.) Press A key to install the complete disk. NOTICE Select A when installing the new HDD . Select B when replacing C:\ partition only. It means all customer data are NOT deleted. The Ghost pro- cedure is performed with data of the drivers D, E, F and Z left." Select C when replacing C:\ partition and Z:\ partition. It means all customer data are NOT deleted. The Ghost procedure is performed with data of the drivers D, E and F left. Z:\ partition used for reloading C:\ partition and Application software will be replaced. Drive Partition Usage (GRUB) grub data C System Files and Application D User Defined and Preset E Patient Archive data F Swap Z C:\partition Repository for Reloading Function Table 8-48 Drive Partition 8 - 114 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 335] 10.)Approx. twenty(20) minutes later, the following screen appears. Eject the Base Image Software Disk from the CD/DVD ROM drive. Figure 8-170 Installation Completion 11.)After removing the disk from the drive, Press ALT + CTRL + DEL key. NOTE: After Installing Base Image Software, the “General failure reading drive A .. Abort, Retry, Fail?” message can be appeared, but Ignore it! All procedure would be uccessfully done. WARNING WARNING Remove the disk from the drive. Otherwise you will be encountered the Base Image Software installation screen iteratively. 12.)The following message box can be displayed after the SYSTEM boot up. Press Yes. Figure 8-171 System Setting Change Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 115
[Page 336] 8-4-2 Verifying Base Image Software 8-4-2-1 Partition Checks 1.) Reboot the SYSTEM and the Desktop screen will be shown as blow. Figure 8-172 Desktop Screen 2.) Click Start button and Run menu, then type explorer and click OK Figure 8-173 Executing Windows Explorer 3.) Right-click My Computer icon on the Desktop and click Manage. Figure 8-174 Opening the Manage Window 8 - 116 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 337] 8-4-2-1 Partition Checks (cont’d) 4.) Select Storage -> Disk Management and check that only File System, Status, Capacity and Drive Letter of each partition are same as follows. NOTE: If 160GB HDD is used, refer to the Figure 8-175. If 80GB HDD is used, refer to Figure 8-176 Figure 8-175 Disk Management 160GB HDD Figure 8-176 Disk Management 80GB HDD NOTE: Repo partition and CD/DVD-ROM Drive's Dirve Letter should be assigned as Z:, G: respectively. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 117
[Page 338] 8-4-2-2 Driver Checks 1.) On the window XP desktop, left click on My Computer then right click on Properties 2.) The System Propertiers window appears. Select Hareware > Device Manager 3.) Verify that ?, X, or ! is not displayed. Figure 8-177 Device Manager If X or ! is displayed: - Left-click on the device with X mark, then right -click on Enable - Left-click on the device with ! mark, then right click on Properties to perform the device driver recognition. When some files are required, designate the file in the directories of C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32 or C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS. If they are not found, search them using a window search function 8 - 118 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 339] 8-4-2-3 USB Printer Checks (USB Printer User Only) Without any newly additional user invention, LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro will recognize the below 18 kinds of USB printer. Printer Name Comment Sony UP-D895/D895MD Digital BW Printer Sony UP-D897 Sony UP-D23MD Digital Color Printer Mitsubishi CP30DW HP 990cxi LexMark Z65 HP 5550 HP 6122 HP 5550 HP 6540 HP 5650 Standard Printer HP 1000 HP 1200 Xerox Phaser 8400 HP Office jet Pro K550 HP Office jet Pro K5400 HP Deskjet D4360 HP Deskjet 6940 This procedure assumes that the P6 software is installed and is functioning properly. 1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on assigned position Table 8-49 USB Port Position USB Port Position Peripheral Right USB Port on Rear Connector Panel Standard Printer Left USB Port on Rear Connector Panel: Digital Color Printer USB Port on OP Printer Bracket Back Panel Digital BW Printer NOTICE If you Plug in USB printer newly, shutdown the system and restart again NOTICE Once plug in the cable one side of the USB port, do NOT change the cable to another port Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 119
[Page 340] 8-4-2-3 USB Printer Checks (USB Printer User Only) (cont’d) Printer Port Figure 8-178 USB Port - Rear Panel Connector Figure 8-179 USB Port - OP Printer Bracket Back Panel 2.) Make sure that printer properties are proper. (Image orientation and size). Refer to the latest Release Notes. 8 - 120 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 341] 8-4-2-4 DMC Checks (DMC User Only) NOTE: DMC Cable is supplied only as an option. 1.) Check DMC Cable (USB to Serial Bridge). 2.) Plug in the Cable as shown on the right side of the USB port. Refer to the Figure 8-180. DMC Cable Plug on the right Figure 8-180 DMC Cable 3.) Ensure USB to Serial Bridge port is recognized by the system. 4.) Trackball to My computer icon and left click 5.) Right click on Properties . 6.) Right click on the Hardware tab. 7.) Right click on the device manager in the middle right of the hardware tab window. 8.) Make sure “USB to Serial Bridge” is displayed as shown Figure 8-181 Figure 8-181 Device Manager Windows Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 121
[Page 342] 8-4-3 Installing Application Software (R2.x.x) NOTE: First time SW installation with peripherals on can cause the BlueScreen. NOTE: When connecting peripherals to the system, make sure to turn off the system first in order to avoid the BlueScreen. WARNING WARNING Base Image software should also be installed prior to the application. 1.) Place the “Application Software” CD into the DVD drive. 2.) Press the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the LCD screen and select “ Run ". Enter “ G:\LoadSoftware ” into the dialog box as shown below. Figure 8-182 Run Load Software 3.) You will see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software, press the Y key to continue. Then the program requests confirmation “Are you sure?”, Press the Y key again. 4.) Select the application type to install. 5.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in Figure 8-183. Figure 8-183 Command Window 6.) Press the "Y" key twice and copying backup files starts. This takes a few minutes. 8 - 122 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 343] 8-4-3 Installing Application Software (R2.x.x) (cont’d) 7.) After copying backup files, the following options appear. Figure 8-184 Select system 8.) Select the product to be installed (P6 or P6 Pro). 9.) The installation process will be started. it will take about 20 minutes. 10.)To apply the preset by region, select one of the below options. Figure 8-185 Region selection Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 123
[Page 344] 8-4-3 Installing Application Software (R2.x.x) (cont’d) 11.)After the installation is completed the system will power off automatically. Figure 8-186 Installation Complete Message NOTE: Some of systems doesn’t power off automatically. In this case, press and hold power button more than 5 sec. to power off. NOTE: Do not operate with using mouse or keyboard during installation procedures. 12.)Turn on the system and immediately eject the button on the DVD drive to eject the DVDROM Verify that the system boots up no error.(It will take a few minutes) NOTE: Whe application installation is completed, reboot is required. 13.)Shut down the system. 14.)Start the system 8 - 124 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 345] 8-4-4 Standard Confirmation & Functional Checks Configure the system settings and perform functional checks after installation of software. Items for configuration and functional checks include: - Confirmation of the software version - Preset Data (if necessary) - Patient Image Data (if necessary) - Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program) 8-4-4-1 Confirming software version 1.) Click on Utility, then select System. 2.) Click on About tab. The software version will be shown on the monitor as shown. Confirm the following: Refer to the Figure 8-187. Figure 8-187 Confirmation of software version 3.) Make sure that Application Software Version (R2.x.x), Software Part Number (described on the Application Software CD-ROM) and Image Part Number (described on the Base Image Software CD-ROM). Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 125
[Page 346] 8-4-4-2 Setting Computer Name 1.) Click on Utility, then select Connectivity. 2.) Click on TCP/IP tab Figure 8-188 TCPIP tab 3.) Type Computer Name NOTICE The Computer name is unique. Check the scanner serial number printed on the label located at the rear lower side of the scanner. For example, when 12345SU1 is printed, P6-12345SU1 must be entered as a computer name NOTICE If Enable DHCP checkbox is checked and LAN cable is disconnected from the system, the system boot-up time might slow down. 4.) Verify that Enable DHCP has no check mark. If checked, remove the mark. NOTE: If Enable DHCP mark is checked, the system cannot checkout by VOLC. 5.) Check if Computer Name, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway are proper ones which you wrote down in section 1-9-1 Saving Connectivity. NOTE: If the "Save" is NOT performed, you can NOT enter Patient screen and NOT perform Export/Import 6.) Click on Save button 7.) Click OK for confirmation dialog box 8.) The system will power OFF automatically. 9.) Turn on the system for functional checks. 8 - 126 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 347] 8-4-4-3 Setting Printer Preferences NOTE: If the 1-3-5 printer setting back-up is NOT performed, ignore this section. 1.) Insert removable disk or media that the printer setting was saved. 2.) Go to Utility -> System -> Peripherals click the Printers. Figure 8-189 Printer set restore 3.) Press the left button of the trackball on the printer which need to be restore from the saved printer setting -> Click "properties" -> Click "Printing Preferences". 4.) If Sony D897 is used, click "Read". Figure 8-190 Printer set restore Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 127
[Page 348] 5.) Select removable disk or media that the printer setting was saved -> Click "Open". Figure 8-191 Printer set restore 6.) Click the "OK" until all printer windows are closed. 7.) If Sony D895 is used, repeat the above step 1 and 3, then set the parameters below in the layout tab and advanced tab. Parameters Descriotions Orientation Portrait or Landscape Paper size Paper size Scaling Rate of length and width Table 8-50 Parameters 8 - 128 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 349] 8.) Click the properties of the Density Adjust". Figure 8-192 Printer set restore 9.) Click "Load". Figure 8-193 Printer set restore 10.)Select removable disk or media which the printer setting was saved -> click "Open. 11.)Click the "OK" until all printer windows are closed. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 129
[Page 350] 12.)If the printer is not support restore option, restore the printer set from the recorded parameters. Parameters Descriotions Orientation Portrait or Landscape Paper size Paper size Scaling Rate of length and width Density AdjustGamma curve Table 8-51 Parameters NOTE: The parameters depend on printers, so the above parameters are shown to another names and more parameters setting could be needed. 8 - 130 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 351] 8-4-4-4 Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program) The Service platform uses a web-based user interface(UI) to provide access to common service components. NOTE: After perform diagnostics, shut down and restart to make the system working properly. 1.) Go to Utility and press Service to launch Service Platform. It will take some seconds for activating. 2.) Make sure that CAPS is not selected (should be dimmed) for password entry performed later. Figure 8-194 Utrlity -> Service 3.) The Service Login window for Service Platform will be shown on the monitor display. Figure 8-195 Log in screen CAUTION If the Login window for Service Platform is not displayed on the monitor, the installation of the Service Platform has failed. Reload the application software or Base System Software (OS) + application software. Contact a Technical Support for details. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 131
[Page 352] 8-4-4-4 Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program) (cont’d) 4.) Select GE Service at the “Select User Level” field. 5.) Enter the password for the Service Platform. 6.) Click on Okay . Figure 8-196 Select User Level 7.) Verify that the following screen (Service Platform) is displayed on the monitor. NOTICE When the service platform is NOT displayed, check if CAPS lock is selected. The CAPS should not be selected. 8.) Click on x located at the upper right corner of the service platform screen to close the Service Platform and return to the scan panel. Figure 8-197 Service Platform screen 8 - 132 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 353] 8-4-4-5 Setting the VCR (if necessary) 1.) Select Utility > System>Peripheral tab 2.) Under Video Settings, PAL or NTSC. 3.) Under VCR, select Composite or S-Video. 4.) Under VCR, select Panasonic LQ-MD800 or Mitsubishi MD3000, as appropriate. Figure 8-198 Utility > System>Peripheral 5.) Click on Save. 6.) Shut down the scanner, then restart the scanner. 7.) Verify that the VCR can be properly operated.. NOTICE Be sure to connect the converter and cablebefore booting up the system. Otherwise the LOGIQ™ P6/ P6 Pro system does not recognize the peripheral devices 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-52 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5245279, Rev 3+, Section 8-4-4. Equipment Section 4-5 Peripheral Checks Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 133
[Page 354] 8-4-4-6 Verifying the VCR (if necessary) 1.) Press Record button, VCR menu shows up at the bottom of the screen. Figure 8-199 VCR Menu 2.) Click Counter Reset, then Press Record ( ) menu to start recording. Figure 8-200 Record Menu Displays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun. Figure 8-201 VCR Status 3.) Press Stop ( )to stop recording the tape at the desired moment. 4.) Press Search to adjust the starting time for video playback. 5.) Press Play to start VCR playback. 8 - 134 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 355] 8-4-4-7 Setting Printer Properties in Application Software (if necessary) 1.) Select Utility -> Connectivity -> Service tab 2.) Select Standard Printer, and Add Figure 8-202 Utility > Connectivity > Service 3.) Under Properties, select desired Printer, and Save. Figure 8-203 Select the Printer Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 135
[Page 356] 8-4-4-8 Print Key Assignment and Checkout(if necessary) 1.) Select Utility-> Connectivity-> Button tap. 2.) Choose the desired print button(for example, Print1) under Physical Print Button. Figure 8-204 Physical Print Button 3.) Select Standard Print ,and press > >Standard Print is added under printflow View. NOTICE Press << to delete a existing Standard Print. Figure 8-205 Standard Print 4.) Press the print key just configured. The screenshot prints to the destination printer. 8 - 136 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 357] 8-4-4-9 Regional Setup Procedure for Japanese You can set up the keyboard for Japanese. If you select Japanese, the following items display or may be entered in Japanese. • Patient Name • Exam Comment (on Patient screen and Worksheet) • Annotation (Comments) • Error/Warning Messages • DICOM/Worklist 1.) In Utility--> System--> General, set the Language as JPN. Save this setting, but do not reboot the system yet. Figure 8-206 Changing the System Language to JPN 2.) Press Regional Options, under Standards and Formats select Japanese, under Location select Japan. Press Apply. Figure 8-207 Regional Options Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 137
[Page 358] 8-4-4-9 Regional Setup Procedure for Japanese (cont’d) 3.) Select the Language tab, press Details, under Installed Services add the Japanese-Microsoft IME Standard 2002 ver. 8.1 keyboard, under Default input language select Japanese, press Apply, Press OK. Figure 8-208 Regional and Language Options—Language Tab 4.) Select the Advanced tab, then select Japanese in the Language for non-Unicode programs pull- down menu. Press Apply. Answer Yes to use files already loaded on the hard disk, then answer No to not reboot the system yet, press OK. Press Save and Exit the Utility screen. 5.) Reboot the system. When yur system restarts, the system appears in the selected language. NOTE: To have the settings take effect, you MUST turn off the system and turn it back on. 6.) In Utility --> System --> General, press Regional Options. Select Language Tab and press Details. Remove English under Installed Services. Press Apply and OK. 7.) To type in Japanese, press Alt + tilde/accent key (located between the Esc and F1 keys) in order to start the Input Method Editor (IME). 8 - 138 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 359] 8-4-4-10 Product Type Check of the System To verify that the correct version of Application software was installed, check the Product Type of the Application software. Verification steps are listed below. 1.) Turn on the system. Wait until the screen comes up. 2.) Press the Utility key and click Admin tab. 3.) Check the value of Product item. Figure 8-209 Checking Product Type 4.) The following table is the matching table. Installed Application Value of Product item P6 Radiology.Arirang2 P6Pro Radiology.Arirang2.Pro Table 8-53 Product Type Matching Table Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 139
[Page 360] Section 8-5Full Backup / Restore Procedure 8-5-1 General This describes a Full Backup (Database, Image, User preset, Service Data) procedure. Use this instruction when you need to save the data : • before changing a HDD with a new one • before reinstalling Base Application • when you just want to save all of the current data. 8-5-2 Parts Required • USB HDD 8-5-3 Full Backup Procedure 1.) While the Echoloader is running, press ‘Utility’ button and click on the ‘Admin’. 2.) When Title Login window pops up, select an operator with admin authorization. 3.) Type in the password. 4.) press “OK”. 5.) Select “System Admin” page. 6.) press “Execute” button under Full Backup box and the window below pops up. Figure 8-210 Backup and Restore Window 8 - 140 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 361] 8-5-3 Full Backup Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Press “Backup”. Then the below window pops up.. Figure 8-211 Emergency Disk Making Wizard 8.) Insert a USB HDD. NOTE: It might take about 30 seconds for the system to recognize the USB HDD. 9.) Press “Next”. 10.)Verify that USB HDD is in the list. 11.)Select USB HDD for backup when Select Drive window is displayed. Figure 8-212 Dirve select Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 141
[Page 362] 8-5-3 Full Backup Procedure (cont’d) 12.)If USB HDD with enough space is not already plugged in, plug in one.Then press Next Figure 8-213 Storage Information 13.)Press next to continue. Then the below windows appear. Figure 8-214 Emergency Disk Making Preparation Figure 8-215 Emergency Disk Making in Progress 14.)Verify that "Backup was completed!" message is displayed. 15.)Press Finish to complete. 8 - 142 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 363] 8-5-4 Restore procedure 1.) From Figure 8-140, press “Restore” button. 2.) Rest of the procedure is the same with “Backup” procedure. NOTICE The system should be rebooted after finishing of Restore procedures. 3.) After reboot, Press "Patient". Verify that Patient data are restored. Press "Utility". Verify that Userdefined data are restored. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 143
[Page 364] Section 8-6Software Reloading 8-6-1 General This describes general Software Reloading of C:\ partition functionality. 8-6-2 Software Reloading Procedure 8-6-2-1 Perform Software Reloading in the Service Platform No media (CD/DVD) is needed to perform this function. This can be done in two ways. A) By logging on to the Service Platform B) To access the system remotely. In case of performing Software Reloading remotely, you will need the assistance of the customer to switch the system back on and put it in disruptive mode. The following procedure applies to both Locally and Remotely. 1.) Go to Utility->System->General 2.) Press “Date/Time” Figure 8-216 Date/Time 8 - 144 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 365] 3.) Press “Time Zone” Figure 8-217 Time Zone 4.) Register the current Time Zone Current Time Zone Table 8-1 Current Time Zone 5.) Press “Cancel”. 6.) Log onto the Service Platform. 7.) Go to “Utilites”->”Common Utilites”. 8.) Go to "Utility"->"System"->"About" Verify that Software version and software build version are same with the ones before the Software Reloading. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 145
[Page 366] 9.) Select “Reload System Software” Figure 8-218 Reload system Software 10.)Verify that "Local Archive" is available under Dataflow. 11.)Press “ReLoad”. 12.)Confirmation message pops up. 13.)Press “Yes” to proceed. 14.)Progress bar is displayed Figure 8-219 Reloading setup in progress 8 - 146 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 367] 15.)Setup is completed successfully a.) If you do s/w reloading from the system directly, please shut down the system now. b.) For remote s/w reloading, please enable Disruptive mode. Figure 8-220 setup completed message 16.)Press “Disruptive mode” Figure 8-221 Disruptive mode Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 147
[Page 368] 17.)If “Disruptive Mode Status” is disabled, Press “Yes” to enable disruptive mode. For the remote reloading, customer has to agree to the diruptive mode. The following window (Figure 8-222) pops up in the system screen and customer has to press “Yes” to enable Disruptive mode. Figure 8-222 Insite Notification 18.)Press “System Shutdown” Figure 8-223 System Shutdown NOTE: If the service dongle is inserted or the system is logged on to the maintenance mode, “System shutdown” will not work. Please close programs and reboot the system manually. 8 - 148 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 369] 19.)Select “Restart System” Figure 8-224 Restart System 20.)Press “Submit” 21.)Press “Confirm” when confirmation message is displayed. 22.)After a while, the system restarts automatically. 23.)Verify that correct date and time are displayed correctly. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 149
[Page 370] 8-6-2-2 Software Reloading 1.) The Base S/W load starts automatically immediately after boot up Figure 8-225 Reloading C:\ partition from Reloading Ghost Image 2.) After finishing C: partition reloading, the system restarts automatically. 3.) When the system restarts, an application installation starts automatically. Figure 8-226 Application installation 8 - 150 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 371] 4.) When installation is finished, the system shuts down automatically. 5.) Press Power Button to start the system. 6.) When system fully boots up after the software reloading, please shutdown system again. NOTE: For the following procedure, disruptive mode should be approved in order to be in done remotely. 7.) Start the system. 8.) Press “Patient” button, and verify under Dataflow that “Local Archive” is available. If it's not available, shut down the unit one more time. 9.) To put the Local Time Zone back, Go to Utility->System->General 10.)Click “Date/Time” Figure 8-227 Date/Time Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 151
[Page 372] 11.)Press Time Zone Figure 8-228 Time Zone 12.)Change the time zone to the local time zone from Table 1. 13.)Press “Apply” 14.)Press “Date&Time” tab. Figure 8-229 Date & Time 8 - 152 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 373] 15.)Change the Date and Time correctly if needed. 16.)Press “Apply” 17.)Press “OK” 18.)Turn off the system. 19.)Start the system. 20.)Check if the correct date and time are displayed. Figure 8-230 Date and Time check 21.)The software reloading is completed. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8 - 153
[Page 374] Section 8-7Mechanical Option Installation instruction These service in structions describe the installation procedures of following mechanical options to LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. 8 - 154 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 375] 8-7-1 Flexible LCD Arm installation Procedure 8-7-1-1 Tools • Common pilIips screwdrivers • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-7-1-2 Preparations • Maneuver control console to a suitable position for removing the monitor. 8-7-1-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-231 Removing the LCD cable cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2306565, BH M4x16 WHT) to remove the power cord bracket assembled under the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-232 Removing the power cord bracket Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 155
[Page 376] 3.) Disconnect power cable and DVI cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-233 Disconnecting power cable and DVI cable 4.) Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Fold cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-234 Removing the Fold cover 5.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm cable cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-235 Removing the Arm cable cover 8 - 156 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 377] 6.) Unscrew 2 screws (5177684, HSH M5x20 WHT) to separate the LCD MONITOR and 1 screw (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Cable bracket. Refer to the figure below. NOTE: While unscrewing the hinge hexa screw from the arm, keep hold of the monitor to prevent dropping down. Figure 8-236 Separating the LCD monitor & Removing the Cable bracket 7.) Unscrew 2 screws (2337572, FH M3x6 WHT) to remove the Arm cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-237 Removing the Arm cover L & Arm cover R Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 157
[Page 378] 8.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159632, BH M4x6 WHT) to remove the Cam cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-238 Removing the Cam cover L & Cam cover R 9.) Unscrew 4 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm bottom cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-239 Removing the Arm bottom cover 10.) Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Lock cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-240 Removing the Lock cover 8 - 158 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 379] 11.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Lower arm guide bracket. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-241 Removing the Lower arm guide bracket 12.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159626, PH M4X20) to remove the Arm stopper. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-242 Removing the Arm stopper 13.) Pull out power cable & DVI cable. Make sure flexible arm not to rotate. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-243 Pulling out power cable & DVI cable Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 159
[Page 380] 14.) Unscrew 4 screws (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Lower arm Cable bracket and pull out power cable & DVI cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-244 Unscrewing 4 screws 15.) Unscrew 3 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) after removing the rubber caps to remove neck front cover, neck rear cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-245 Unscrewing 3 screws and removing the neck front cover & neck rear cover 8 - 160 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 381] 16.) Unscrew 3 screws(5327646, HSH M6 X 16 WHT) to separate the flexible arm neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-246 Separating the neck pipe 17.) Unscrew 1 screw (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the OP bracket. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-247 Removing OP bracket 18.) Unscrew 3 screws (2373562, FH M4x10 YEL) to separate the Flexible arm stopper(A+B). Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-248 Separating the flexible arm stopper Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 161
[Page 382] 19.) Pull out power cable & DVI cable and remove the oilless bush after separating the neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-249 Pulling out power cable & DVI cable and removing the stopper 8 - 162 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 383] 8-7-1-4 Assembly procedure 1.) Insert two of the flexible arm stoppers (A+B) to the Power Cable and DVI cable in the Order illustrated on the figure below. Make sure that chamfered shape of the flexible Arm stopper should face inside. Refer to the figure below. Flexible Arm Stopper Figure 8-250 Changing the MON PWR CONN LONG cable 2.) Insert oilless bush into the flexible arm neck pipe and insert two cables into the flexible arm neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-251 Inserting the oilless bush 3.) Insert the flexible arm into the flexible arm neck pipe. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-252 Inserting the flexible arm Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 163
[Page 384] 4.) Screw 3 screws (2373562, FH M4X10 YEL) to fix the flexible arm stopper after adjusting the holes. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-253 Fixing the flexible arm stopper 5.) Screw 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to install OP bracket. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-254 Installing OP Bracket 6.) Screw 3 screws (5327646, HSH M6X16 WHT) to install the arm neck pipe. Make sure place DVI cable be on the right side, power cable on the left side. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-255 Assembling the arm neck pipe 8 - 164 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 385] 7.) Screw 2 screws (5177684, HSH M5X20 WHT) to assemble the LCD monitor with flexible arm Top part. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-256 Screwing 2 screws 8.) Insert the two cables inside the Flexible arm and Screw 4 screws (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lower arm cable bracket Figure 8-257 Screwing 4 screws 9.) Put in the two cables. Refer to the figure below. Make sure place DVI cable be on the right side, power cable on the left side. Figure 8-258 Putting in the cables Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 165
[Page 386] 10.) Screw 2 screws (2159626, PH M4X20) to assemble the Arm stopper. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-259 Installing the Arm Stopper 11.) Screw 2 screws (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lower arm guide bracket.Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-260 Assembling the Lower arm guide Bracket 12.) Tie the Cables with Cable tie. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-261 Tying the cables 8 - 166 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 387] 13.) Place the cables inside the slot and connect power cable and DVI cable. Refer to the Figure below. Figure 8-262 Placing the Cables 14.) Assemble the Cable bracket with 1 Screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) Figure 8-263 Assembling the Cable bracket 15.) Screw 2 screws (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) to assemble the Arm Cable Cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-264 Assembling the Arm Cable Cover Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 167
[Page 388] 16.) Place the cables like the figure below. Figure 8-265 Placing the cables 17.) Screw 1 screw (2306565, BH M4X16 WHT) to fix the Power cable. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-266 Assembling the power cord bracket 8 - 168 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 389] 18.) Assemble the LCD cable cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-267 Assembling the LCD cable cover Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 169
[Page 390] 19.) Screw 3 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) after placing the neck front cover and neck Rear cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-268 Assembling the neck front cover and the neck rear cover 20.) Screw 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lock Knob. Figure 8-269 Assembling the Lock Knob 8 - 170 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 391] 21.) Screw 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to assemble the Lock Cover. Figure 8-270 Assembling the Lock Cover 22.) Screw 2 screws (2159632, BH M4X6 WHT) to assemble the Cam Cover L & R. Figure 8-271 Assembling the Cam Cover L & R Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 171
[Page 392] 23.) Screw 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to assemble the Fold Cover. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-272 Assembling the Fold Cover 24.) Screw 2 screws (2337572, FH M3X6 WHT) to assemble the Arm cover L & R. Refer to the figure Figure 8-273 Assembling the Arm Cover L & R 8 - 172 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 393] 25.) Screw 4 screws (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) to assemble the Arm bottom Cover. Refer to the figure Figure 8-274 Assembling the Arm bottom cover 26.) Completed picture of the Flexible Arm. Figure 8-275 Flexible Arm Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 173
[Page 394] 8-7-2 Endo Probe Holder Installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of EndoProbe Holder. 2.) Install Cable Arm Hook. Refer to the Figure 8-276. 3.) Check out the 2 screw holes to be used to install Endo Probe Holder. Refer to the Figure 8-276. Figure 8-276 Endo Probe Holder Installation 4.) Install Endo Probe holder on the bottom side of the the Cable Arm Hook by screwing 2 screws (1- 2). Refer to the Figure 8-277. Figure 8-277 Endo Probe Holder 8 - 174 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 395] 8-7-3 Microphone Option fixture Installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of the microphone option fixture. 2.) Use 2 holes at the bottom of the keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-278. Figure 8-278 Microphone option holes 3.) Screw 2 screws to fix the Microphone fixture. Refer to the Figure 8-279. Figure 8-279 installation of Microphone Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 175
[Page 396] 8-7-4 Drawer Option installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of the drawer option. 2.) Push the drawer from the front to the rear direction. Refer to the Figure 8-280 Figure 8-280 Drawer Option Installation 3.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the middle cover. 4.) Using the bracket, fix the drawer by screwing 3 screws each of left and right side of the drawer. Refer to the Figure 8-281. 2337572 (Screw, FH M3x6 WHT) 5176744 Middle Cover (Screw, BH M4x20 WHT) Figure 8-281 Installation of Drawer Option 8 - 176 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 397] 8-7-5 Cable Arm Hook installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of cable arm hook. 2.) Cable Arm Hook should be installed in prior to installing Probe Cable Hanger, or Endo Probe Holder. 3.) Unscrew 1 existing screw from the rear side of the keyboard. Refer to the Figure 8-282. Figure 8-282 Cable Arm Hook installation 4.) Screw 2 screws to fix the Cable Arm hook. User longer screw provide on the upper hole, and use existing screw removed in the step 2 on the . Refer to the Figure 8-283. Figure 8-283 Cable Arm Hook installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 177
[Page 398] 8-7-6 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of BW printer keyboard. 2.) Put loctite 290 on the screw(2159634, BH M4X10 WHT)'s edge. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-284 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 3.) Fix the BW printer brkt beneath the keyboard by the (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT). Refer to the figure Figure 8-285 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 8 - 178 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 399] 8-7-6 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation (cont’d) 4.) Fix the BW printer base bracket to the BW Printer by screwing 4 screws(2306562, FH M3x6 YEL) (1-4). Refer to the figure below. (2) (1) base bracket (4) (3) Figure 8-286 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 5.) Slide and place the BW printer with base bracket to the BW printer bracket and screw 2 screws (5178673, FH M4x6 WHT) (1-2) to fix it. Refer to the figure below. (1) (2) Figure 8-287 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 179
[Page 400] 8-7-6 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation (cont’d) 6.) Connect the Power Cable and USB Cable from the printer to the system and tie the cable properly. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-288 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 7.) Install the BW Printer hide bracket to the rear side of the printer and screw 2 screws(5178673, FH M4x6 WHT) on each side to fix it. Refer to the figure below. Figure 8-289 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 8 - 180 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 401] 8-7-7 BW printer Fixture Middle installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of BW printer fixture in the middle poisition. 2.) Install BW Printer on the top of the base bracket by screwing 4 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-290. base bracket Figure 8-290 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 3.) Unscrew 2 existing screw from the middle cover. 4.) Place the BW printer with base bracket on the middle cover and screw 2 screws to fix it. Refer to the Figure 8-291. Figure 8-291 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 181
[Page 402] 5.) Connect the USB cable and power cable from the printer to the system. Refer to the Figure 8-292. Figure 8-292 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 6.) Install BW hide bracket to the rear side of the BW printer and screw 2 screws to fix it. Refer to the Figure 8-293. (2) Figure 8-293 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 7.) Tie the cables using the tie wrap as illustrated in Figure 8-294. Figure 8-294 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 8 - 182 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 403] 8-7-8 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP23MD Printer 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of color printer fixture in the middle poisition. 2.) Install color printer on the top of the base bracket by screw 4 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-295. Base Bracket Figure 8-295 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 3.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the middle cover. 4.) Screw 2 screws on each side of the system to fix the Color printer with base bracket to the system. Figure 8-296. Figure 8-296 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 183
[Page 404] 5.) Connect the USB cable and Power cable from the color printer to the system as shown in Figure 8- 297. Figure 8-297 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 6.) Install Color printer hide bracket and screw 4 screws to fix it. Refer to the Figure 8-298. Figure 8-298 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 8 - 184 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 405] 7.) Tie the cables using the tie wrap as illustrated in Figure 8-299. Figure 8-299 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 185
[Page 406] 8-7-9 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of color printer fixture for UP-23MD printer. 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the top cover. Refer to the Figure 8-300. Figure 8-300 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 3.) Install Fixture Top bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-301. Figure 8-301 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 8 - 186 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 407] 8-7-9 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer (cont’d) 4.) Install color printer to the base bracket by screwing 4 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-302. Figure 8-302 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 5.) Screw 2 screws on both sides to fix the color printer with base bracket to the color printer top bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-303. Figure 8-303 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 6.) Connect the USB cable and Power cable from the color printer to the system. For more wiring information, refer to the Basic Service Manual. Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 187
[Page 408] 8-7-9 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer (cont’d) 7.) Install hide bracket by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-304. Figure 8-304 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 8.) Tie the cable properly using the tie wrap. 8 - 188 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 409] 8-7-10 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of Color Printer fixture for CP-900 printer. 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the top cover. Refer to the Figure 8-305. Figure 8-305 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 3.) Install Fixture Top bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-306. Figure 8-306 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 189
[Page 410] 8-7-10 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer (cont’d) 4.) Install color printer to the base bracket by screwing 4 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-307. Figure 8-307 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 5.) Screw 2 screws on each sides to fix the color printer with base bracket to the color printer top bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-308. (3) (4) (1) (2) Figure 8-308 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 6.) Connect the USB from the color printer as shown in Figure 8-309. Figure 8-309 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8 - 190 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 411] 8-7-10 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer (cont’d) 7.) Connect the cable from the color printer to the system. Refer to the Figure 8-310. Figure 8-310 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8.) Install hide bracket by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-311. Figure 8-311 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 9.) Tie the cable properly using the tie wrap. Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 191
[Page 412] 8-7-11 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-3000) 8-7-11-1 VCR Remote Port Configuration 1.) LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro control the Mitsubishi MD-3000 VCR through USB. Hence the VCR remote control port must be configured as USB 2.) Open the remote control module in the VCR. Refer to the Figure 8-312 Figure 8-312 VCR Remote Control Panel 3.) Unscrew 2 screws on the VCR remote control port panel and out the remote control module from VCR. Unscrew 1 screw on the module. Refer to the Figure 8-313. Figure 8-313 VCR Remote Control Panel 2 8 - 192 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 413] 8-7-11-1 VCR Remote Port Configuration (cont’d) 4.) Set the DIP switch on the VCR remote control panel. The SW 7 in DIP switch should be set to “ON” position for the USB remote control . Refer to the Figure 8-314. Figure 8-314 DIP Switch on the Panel 5.) Insert the remote control module into the VCR and connect the USB cable between the “Remote” USB on the console rear panel and USB port of VCR. 6.) Plug the service dongle and turn on the VCR and System. 7.) Login to maintanance mode and open the device manager. 8.) Check if the VCR remote device is identified by OS. Refer to the Figure 8-315. Figure 8-315 Remote device in the device manager Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 193
[Page 414] 8-7-11-2 Bracket Installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of VCR recorder fixture for MD-3000 printer. 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the top cover. Refer to the Figure 8-316. Figure 8-316 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 3.) Install Fixture Top bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-317. Figure 8-317 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8 - 194 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 415] 8-7-11-2 Bracket Installation (cont’d) 4.) Install VCR recorder to the base bracket by screwing 4 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-318. Figure 8-318 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 5.) Screw 2 screws on each side of the system to fix the VCR recorder with base bracket to the VCR top bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-319. Figure 8-319 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 6.) Connect the cables (Power Cable, USB cable, S-VHS Cable, and Sound cables) from the VCR to the system. Refer to the Figure 8-320. Figure 8-320 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 195
[Page 416] 8-7-11-2 Bracket Installation (cont’d) 7.) Connect the cables to the system on the rear panel. Refer to the Figure 8-321. Figure 8-321 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8.) Install VCR hide bracket by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-322. Figure 8-322 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8 - 196 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 417] 8-7-12 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of DVD fixture. 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the top cover. Refer to the Figure 8-323. Figure 8-323 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (MD-800) 3.) Install Fixture Top bracket on the top cover by screwing 4 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-324. Figure 8-324 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (MD-800) Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 197
[Page 418] 8-7-12 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) (cont’d) 4.) Install DVD recorder to the base bracket by screwing 2 screws on each side. Refer to the Figure 8- 325. Figure 8-325 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (MD-800) 5.) Connect the USB cable and power cable from the DVD to the system. 6.) Connect the cables to the system on the rear panel. 7.) Install DVD hide bracket by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8-326. Figure 8-326 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (MD-800) 8 - 198 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 419] 8-7-13 Rear Handle installation 1.) This desribes installation procedure of Rear Handle. 2.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove Rear hook. Refer to the Figure 8-327. Figure 8-327 Rear Handle Installation 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove the rear handle bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-328. (1) (2) Figure 8-328 Rear Handle Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 199
[Page 420] 8-7-13 Rear Handle installation (cont’d) 4.) Screw 2 screws (1-2) from the back of the rear handle. Refer to the Figure 8-329. Figure 8-329 Rear Handle Installation 5.) Screw 1 screw and Install handle dummy bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-330. (1) Figure 8-330 Rear Handle Installation 8 - 200 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 421] 8-7-14 Additional Task Lamp installation 1.) This is the installation instruction of additional task lamp. Refer to the Figure 8-331. Figure 8-331 Additional Task Lamp Installation 2.) Connect the USB connector to the location of light bulb mark. Refer to the Figure 8-332. Figure 8-332 Additional Task Lamp Installation 3.) Install plastic holder to the task lamp bracket. Refer to the Figure 8-333. Figure 8-333 Additional Task Lamp Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 201
[Page 422] 8-7-14 Additional Task Lamp installation (cont’d) 4.) Install task lamp bracket to the rear side of keyboard by screwing 2 screws. Refer to the Figure 8- 334. Figure 8-334 Additional Task Lamp Installation 5.) Fix the tasklamp light as shown on Figure 8-335. Figure 8-335 Additional Task Lamp Installation 6.) Install BW hide bracket if it is uninstalled during the installation process. Refer to the Figure 8-336. Figure 8-336 Additional Task Lamp Installation 8 - 202 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 423] 8-7-15 Protect Cover Installation 1.) Install the prtective covers in rear and front as shown in Figure 8-337 using the double side adhesive tape. Double side adhesive tape Figure 8-337 Protect Cover Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8 - 203
[Page 424] Section 8-8 Final Procedures 1.) After all peripherals have been installed, ensure that all cables are neatly and properly routed to the system back and front panel. Use tiewraps, if necessary. 2.) Properly store excess cable in the back panel cavity behind the door. 3.) Fill out the proper customer information on the Product Locator Card. Mail the installation card “Product Locator” to the address corresponding to your region. Refer to the Figure 8-338. Figure 8-338 Product Locator Card NOTE: The Product Locator Card indicated in Figure 8-338 may be different from the actually provided on. 4.) Properly dispose of any excess material in accordance with current GE Medical System policy. 5.) Once all peripherals are installed, ensure that the operation of the system is verified once again by performing the functional checks. Refer to Functional Checks in Chapter 4, LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Service Manual. 6.) Ensure that each peripheral operates properly from the LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro keyboard, monitor, peripheral’s own front panel or remote controls. Inform the customer of proper peripheral operation. 7.) Keep this documentation with LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro Service Manual. for feature reference. 8.) This completes the installation of the Mechanical Options. 8 - 204 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 425] Chapter 9 Renewal Parts Section 9-1Overview 9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9 This chapter gives you an overview of Renewal Parts for LOGIQ™ P6/P6 Pro. Table 9-1 Contents in Chapter 9 Section Description Page Number 9-1 Overview 9-1 9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-2 • AEXP - Arirang External Peripheral 9-2 9-4 KEYBOARD 9-5 9-5 COVERS 9-7 9-6 NEST 9-9 9-7 BODY 9-11 9-8 POWER 9-13 9-9 Cables 9-15 9-10 Options 9-19 9-11 Software 9-20 9-12 Probes 9-21 9-13 Peripherals 9-22 Section 9-1 - Overview 9 - 1
[Page 426] Section 9-2List of Abbreviations • Assy - Assembly • Ctrl - Control • FRU 1 - Replacement part available in part hub • FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved) • Int - Internal • I/O - Input/Output • KB - Keyboard • LCD - Liquid Crystal Display • MON - Monitor • PAT - Patient • PC - Personal Computer (Back End Processor) • PI128 II - Probe interface 128 II • DTRX64 II - Duplex TX & RX 64 channel • CWD64 - Continuous wave Doppler 64 channel • SYSCONML - SYSCON for Multi Line acquisition • APS II - Arirang Power Supply II • RFC - Radio Frequency connection • BP128 - Backplane 128 • P3RLY - Port 3 Relay • AEXP - Arirang External Peripheral 9 - 2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations
[Page 427] Section 9-3MONITOR Figure 9-1 Monitor Section 9-3 - MONITOR 9 - 3
[Page 428] • AEXP - Arirang External Peripheral (cont’d) 100 LP6 Monitor cover set 5267673 Common 1 1 Yes Yes 101 LP6 17” LCDMON Assy 5327227 Common 1 1 Yes Yes 102 New Articulation Arm with Covers 5257030 Common 1 1 Yes Yes 103 New Articulation Arm Cover set 5257033 Common 1 1 Yes Yes Table 9-2 MONITOR 9 - 4 Section 9-3 - MONITOR
[Page 429] Section 9-4 KEYBOARD Figure 9-2 KEYBOARD BLOCK Section 9-4 - KEYBOARD 9 - 5
[Page 430] Section 9-4 KEYBOARD (cont’d) LP6 Main Keyboard Assy 5252353 1 1 Yes Yes P6 BT09 Main Keyboard Assy for JPN 5334850 Japanese Keyboard 1 1 Yes LP6 Sub Keyboard Assy 5252352 1 1 Yes Yes P6 BT09 Sub Keyboard Assy for JPN 5334851 P6 Japanese Keyboard 1 1 Yes P6 PRO BT09 Sub Keyboard Assy for P6Pro Japanese 5334852 1 1 Yes JPN Keyboard 202 Trackball Assy 5144543 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 English A/N Key Assy 5252354 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 Greek A/N Key Assy 5252355 1 1 Yes Yes 203 LP6 Russian A/N Key Assy 5252356 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 Swedish A/N Key Assy 5252357 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 Norweigian A/N Key Assy 5252358 1 1 Yes Yes 204 Freeze Key Assy 5144540 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 205 TGC Key Assy 5144541 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 206 TGC Knob Set 5144542 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 207 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob set 5144539 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 208 LOGIQ P5 Keycap set 5144547 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 209 Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set 5177823 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 210 LP6 PRO Sub Keyboard Assy 5327233 1 1 Yes Table 9-3 KEYBOARD 9 - 6 Section 9-4 - KEYBOARD
[Page 431] Section 9-5 COVERS 311 310 301 300 313 312 Figure 9-3 COVERS Section 9-5 - COVERS 9 - 7
[Page 432] Section 9-5 COVERS (cont’d) 300 LP6 Side Left Cover 5327214 1 1 Yes Yes 301 LP6 Side Right Cover 5327215 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 Front Cover 5252309 1 1 Yes P6 BT09 Front Cover 5336567 BT09 Product only 1 1 Yes 303 LP6 Rear Cover 5252315 1 1 Yes Yes 304 LP6 Middle Cover 5252310 1 1 Yes Yes 305 LP6 Top Cover 5252319 1 1 Yes Yes 306 LP6 Top Bottom Cover 5252318 1 1 Yes Yes 307 LP6 Pole Cover 5252314 1 1 Yes Yes 308 LP6 Neck Front 5252311 1 1 Yes Yes 309 LP6 Neck Rear 5252312 1 1 Yes Yes 310 Dummy Cover L 5257053 1 1 Yes Yes 311 Dummy Cover R 5257042 1 1 Yes Yes 312 EMI Cover L 5327123 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 313 EMI Cover R 5327212 1 1 Yes Yes 314 LP6 Protective Covers 5257036 1 1 Yes Yes Table 9-4 COVERS 9 - 8 Section 9-5 - COVERS
[Page 433] Section 9-6 NEST 403 404 Figure 9-4 PCB BOARDS Section 9-6 - NEST 9 - 9
[Page 434] Section 9-6 NEST (cont’d) Probe Conneciton 401 PI128 II Assy 5327228 1 1 Yes Yes Board 64Ch TX/RX 402 DTRX64II Assy 5252321-2 1 1 Yes Yes Beamforming Board 64Ch Continous Wave 403 CWD64 Assy 5245003 1 1 Yes Yes Doppler Board Main Control & BEP 404 SYSCONML Assy (with SOM) 5252326-2 1 1 Yes Yes Board DC Voltage Power 405 APS II Assy 5245004 1 1 Yes Yes Supply 406 DualCore SOM 5252327-2 PC module 1 1 Yes Yes 128Ch TX/RX Signal 407 RFC Assy 5252324 1 1 Yes Yes Connection Board 408 BP128 Assy 5252320 Backplane Board 1 1 Yes Yes 409 P6 Nest FAN Assy 5252349 FAN assy for Nest Box 1 1 Yes Yes 410 P6 TRANS FAN Assy 5252350 FAN assy for TransBox 1 1 Yes Yes FAN cooler in 411 DTRX Cooler with heatsink 5252351 2 1 Yes DTRX64II 412 SYSCON Base 5270805-2 1 1 Yes Yes 413 LP6 CW Doppler kit 5269166 1 1 Yes Yes 414 P3RLY assy 5144579-2 LP6 BT09 Pro Only 1 1 Yes 415 RFC PRO Assy 5266433 LP6 BT09 Pro Only 1 1 Yes Table 9-5 NEST 9 - 10 Section 9-6 - NEST
[Page 435] Section 9-7 BODY 500 501 503 506 511 512 Figure 9-5 BODY BLOCK Section 9-7 - BODY 9 - 11
[Page 436] Section 9-7 BODY (cont’d) 500 Front Caster 5144523 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 501 Rear Caster 5144524 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 502 Rear Handle 5144525 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 503 Rear Hook 5165418 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 504 Probe Holder 5165304 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 505 Cup Holder 5168950 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 506 ECG Cable Hook 5164599 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 507 Air Filter Set 5144526 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 ARP Assy 110V 5252328 1 1 Yes Yes LP6 ARP Assy 220V 5252329 1 1 Yes Yes 510 Cable Arm Hook 5178888-2 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 511 LP6 SATA HDD (80GB) Assy 5257055 R1.x.x Only 1 1 Yes 512 SATA HDD (160GB) Assy 5328125 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Table 9-6 BODY BLOCK Samsung SATA DVD + 508 DVD Assy Set 5327112 1 1 Yes BRKT Samsung latptop type Slim 513 Samsung Slim DVD Drive 5264920-2 1 1 Yes DVD drive Samsung Slim DVD driver 514 LP6 DAB Assy 5315406 1 1 Yes adapter Assy Table 9-7 DVD 9 - 12 Section 9-7 - BODY
[Page 437] Section 9-8 POWER Figure 9-6 POWER BLOCK Section 9-8 - POWER 9 - 13
[Page 438] Section 9-8 POWER (cont’d) 600 ACPCII Assy 5257219 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes AP950 Transbox Assy 110V 5252288 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes AP950 Transbox Assy 220V 5252287 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Fuse Set 110 5252322 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Fuse Set 220 5252323 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord 110v 2389073 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord 220v 5308254 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for China 2389074 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for Israel 5189985 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for Argentina 5189874 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 603 Power Code for Italy 5189619 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for Denmark 5189461 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for ANZ 5189439 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for UK/HK 5189398 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for Switzerland 5189311 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Power Cord for India 5189127 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes Table 9-8 POWER BLOCK 9 - 14 Section 9-8 - POWER
[Page 439] Section 9-9Cables Figure 9-7 Cable Section 9-9 - Cables 9 - 15
[Page 440] Section 9-9 Cables (cont’d) Mon Pwr Cable, BW PWR Cable, Speaker cables 1. Mon PWR Cable, Connect one side (Label:MON) to LP6 17" LCDMON Assy and another side (Label: CON 11) to Lable CON 11 of Internal AC Power cable assy 2. BW PWR Cable, Connect one side 701 Top Cable Assy 1 5252344 1 1 Yes Yes (Label:CON10) to Label CON10 of USB CON Cable CON9) to Lable CON9 of LP6 ARP II Assy 3. Speaker Cable, Connect one side (Label: L & R) to Label L,R of LP6 Speaker Assy and another side (Label:J207) to PCB Silk J207 of LP6 Backplane DVI Cable, SPK cable, KB Control cable, KB USB cable, 1. DVI Cable, Connect one side (Label:DVI) to LP6 17"LCDMON Assy and another side (Label:J206) to PCB Silk J206 of LP6 Backplane Assy 2. Keyboard Control Cable, Connect one side (Label:CON1) to Label CON1 of LP6 Keyboard Assy and another side (Label: J209) to PCB Silk 702 Top Cable Assy 2 5252345 1 1 Yes Yes J209 of LP6 Backplane 3. Keyboard USB Cable, Connect one side (Label:KBD) to LP6 Keyboard Assy J221) to PCB Silk J221 of LP6 Backplane Assy 4. BW Print USB Cable, Connect one side (Label:PRN) to BW Printer Bracket J223) to PCB Silk J223 of LP6 Backplane Assy 9 - 16 Section 9-9 - Cables
[Page 441] Front USB Cable, MIC Cable 1. MIC Cable, Connect one side (Label:MIC) to LP6 Front USB Bracket and another side (Label: J205) to PCB 703 Top Cable Assy 3 5252346 Silk J205 of Backplane 1 1 Yes Yes 2. Front USB Cable, Connect one side (Label: F_USB) to LP6 Front USB Bracket and another side (Label: J14) to Label J14 of ARP Assy Connect one side(Label: J3) to PCB Silk "J3" of LP6 Backplane and another 704 ACPC Cable II 5168846 side(Label:CON2, T-FAN) 1 1 Yes Yes to Label CON2 and T-FAN of Internal ACPC Con Cable Assy 2 Connect one side to BW Printer Power cable and 705 Printer Cable Assy 1 5177395 another side to External 1 1 Yes Yes Printer (short cable) Connect one side to BW Printer Power cable and 706 Printer Cable Assy 2 5168842 1 1 Yes Yes another side to External Printer(long cable) EIDE Cable II, SATA Cable, DVD Power Cable 1. EIDE Cable II, Connect one side (Label:ODDI) to LP6 ODD Assy and another side (Label: J204) to PCB Silk J204 of LP6 Backplane 707 HDD/ODD Cable Set 5252342 1 1 Yes Yes 2. SATA Cable, Connect one side to LP6 HDD Assy and another side to LP6 Backplane Assy 3. DVD Power Cable, Connect one side (Label:ODD) to LP6 APS II Assy and another side to LP6 ODD Assy Connect one side (Label:APS II) to Label APS II of LP6 APS II Assy 708 APS II AC Power Cable 5252347 1 1 Yes Yes CON3) to Label CON3 of AC Out Cable Section 9-9 - Cables 9 - 17
[Page 442] Connect one side (Label CON5) to Label CON5 of 709 Peripheral AC Power Cable 5165244 AC Out Cable and another 1 1 Yes Yes side (Label: CON6) to Label CON6 of ARP Assy Connect one side (Label J13) to Label PCB Silk J13 of Syscon Assy 710 AEXP Cable 5172066 1 1 Yes Yes J15) to Label J15 of ARP Connect one side to DCWD Bracket and another 711 DCWD Cable II Assy 5257056 1 1 Yes Yes side(Label: J7) to PCB Silk J7 of CWD64 Assy ECG Patient cable only for 712 IEC Type ECG CABLE 5196518 1 1 Yes Yes Japan ECG Patient cable for Asia, 713 AHA Type ECG CABLE 5196519 1 1 Yes Yes US, Europe 9 - 18 Section 9-9 - Cables
[Page 443] Section 9-10 Options 801 Endo Probe Holder 5171933 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 802 VCR DVD Fixture Top 5171717-2 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 803 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard 5172473-2 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 804 BW Printer Fixture Middle 5172353 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 805 VCR Color Printer DVD Fixture Middle 5172238-2 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 806 Paper Holder 5172484-2 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 807 Probe Cable Hanger 5172178 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 808 Drawer 5171620 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 809 LP6 4D KIT 5171709-5 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 810 3buttons Foot Switch 5327110 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 811 1 Button Foot Switch 5327111 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 812 Additional Task Lamp KIT 5171582 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 813 Microphone 5171727 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 814 Swivel Lock Caster 5184603 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Yes 815 LP6 Touch up paint 5257041 1 1 Yes Yes 816 ARC Switch Set 5327115 Common with LP5 1 1 Yes Table 9-10 Options Section 9-10 - Options 9 - 19
[Page 444] Section 9-11Software Item Part Name FRU Number Description Qty FRU 801 LP6 CD SET 5252308-3 R1.0.3 1 1 802 LP6 BT09 CD set 5327218 R2.0.X 1 1 Table 9-11 Software 9 - 20 Section 9-11 - Software
[Page 445] Section 9-12 Probes Item Part Name Part Number Qty FRU R1.0.X R2.0.X 901 4C Probe 5123455 1 1 Yes Yes 902 5CS Probe 5143934 1 1 Yes Yes 903 8C Probe 2348094 1 1 Yes Yes 904 E8C Probe 2294641 1 1 Yes Yes 905 E8CS Probe 47236865 1 1 Yes Yes 906 8L Probe 5140738 1 1 Yes Yes 907 9L Probe 5149427 1 1 Yes Yes 908 11L Probe 5171885 1 1 Yes Yes 909 i739 Probe 2259206 1 1 Yes Yes 910 t739 Probe 2259246 1 1 Yes Yes 911 3S Probe 2323337 1 1 Yes Yes 912 5S Probe 2347469 1 1 Yes Yes 913 7S Probe 2347471 1 1 Yes Yes 914 4D3C-L Probe KTZ195893 1 1 Yes Yes 915 4DE7C Probe KTZ195859 1 1 Yes Yes 916 ERB Probe 2258309 1 1 Yes Yes 917 BE9C Probe 2389382 1 1 Yes Yes 918 BE9CS Probe 5266132 1 1 Yes 919 P2D Probe TE100024 1 1 Yes Yes 920 P6D Probe TQ100002 1 1 Yes Yes 921 3CRF 5196216 1 1 Yes Yes 922 i12L Probe 2264883 1 1 Yes 923 3Sp Probe 5327196 1 1 Yes 924 5Sp Probe 5327197 1 1 Yes 925 4D8C Probe KTZ156959 1 1 Yes 926 6Tc KN100105 1 1 Yes 927 UG7C Probe 5147187 1 1 Yes Yes 928 4D5C-L Probe KTZ156790 1 1 Yes Table 9-12 Probes Section 9-12 - Probes 9 - 21
[Page 446] Section 9-13Peripherals Item Part Name FRU Number Description Qty FRU Panasonic LQ-MD800P 1 LQ-MD800P 5120592 1 1 DVR Video Recorder Panasonic LQ-MD800E 2 LQ-MD800E 5120593 1 1 DVR Video Recorder 3 VCR Mitsubishi HS-MD3000U 066E9513 VCR 1 1 4 VCR Mitsubishi HS-MD3000E 066E9514 VCR 1 1 5 SONY UP-D897MD 5171608 Digital B/W printer 1 1 6 SONY UP-D23MD 2401985 Digital Color printer 1 1 7 Mitsubishi CP30DW 5310492 Digital Color printer 1 1 8 HP 990cxi 066E0407 Standard printer 1 1 9 HP 6122 2378741 Standard printer 1 1 10 HP 5550 LNR41100 Standard printer 1 1 11 HP 6540 5121837 Standard printer 1 1 12 HP 5650 5121839 Standard printer 1 1 13 HP Business Inkjet 1200 066E0424 Standard printer 1 1 14 HP Office jet Pro K5400 EQ100158 Standard printer 1 1 Table 9-13 Peripherals 9 - 22 Section 9-13 - Peripherals
[Page 447] Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance Section 10-1 Overview 10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ P6 system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual. 10-1-2 Purpose of Chapter 10 This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance . Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task. Table 10-1 Contents in Chapter 10 Section Description Page Number 10-1 Overview 10-1 10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2 10-4 Tools Required 10-4 10-5 System Maintenance 10-7 10-6 Electrical Safety Tests 10-12 10-7 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-28 CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting cables. DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED. CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this. Section 10-1 - Overview 10 - 1
[Page 448] Section 10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2-1 Keeping Records It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-29) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis. A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner. 10-2-2 Quality Assurance In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee. Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken. Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site. Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service. Section 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ P6 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention. NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ P6 care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance. Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ P6 ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service. The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ P6 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities. NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies. 10 - 2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance
[Page 449] Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule Per Facilities Service at Indicated Time Daily Monthly Quaterly QA Program Notes Clean Probes •* * or before each use Clean Probe Holders • more frequently depending on Clean Air Filter • your environment Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check Weekly Inspect Cables and Connectors • Clean Console • Clean Monitor and Touch Panel • Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and • Mobile Unit Check Daily Swivel Locks Check Control Panel Movement • Mobile Unit Check Daily also after corrective Console Leakage Current Checks • maintenance also after corrective Peripheral Leakage Current Checks • maintenance also after corrective Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks • maintenance Endocavity Probe Leakage also after corrective Current Checks maintenance Transesphongeal Probe Leakage also after corrective Current Checks maintenance Surgical Probe Leakage also after corrective Current Checks maintenance also after corrective Measurement Accuracy Checks • maintenance also after corrective Probe/Phantom Checks • maintenance also after corrective Functional Checks • maintenance Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule 10 - 3
[Page 450] Section 10-4 Tools Required 10-4-1 Standard GE Tool Kit The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the USA. Not all tools are required for PMs. Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents Tool ID Description Tool ID Description 9-45358 Pliers Retaining Ring 9-XL9971MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27mm 9-4078 Scribe 9-XL9972MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5mm 9-44572 Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16 9-XL9973MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2 mm 9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9974MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5mm 9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9975MM Xcelite-hex Blade 3mm 9-45385 Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch 9-XL9976MM Xcelite-hex Blade 4mm 9-45378 Pliers, Slip Joint 9-XL9977MM Xcelite-hex Blade 5mm 9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature 9-XL991CM Handle 9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature C2356E Screw starter - Kedman Quick Wedge 9-44776 Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc. BLBO Box - 18 Compartment 9-44601 Wrench, Adj., 4 inch DWL4283T Box - 5 Compartment 9-4151 Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby 9-41322 Pickup Tool, Claw type 9-41421 Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip 9-6757 6 pc Needle File Set 9-41594 Screwdriver, Blade 1/8 in. x 4 in. 9-9487 Utility Knife 9-41581 Screwdriver, Blade 3/16 in. x 4 in. 9-45341 Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch 9-39451 20' Steel Tape, locking Spring load 9-3001 Xacto Pen Knife 9-GH807 Ratchet, Offset, Slotted 9-HT62002 Solder Aid, Fork and Hook 68-412 Ratchet, Offset, Phillips 9-4099 Mirror, Round, Telescoping 9-GH130 Tapered Reamer 9-GH3001 Steel Rule Decimal 6 inch 9-41584 Screwdriver, slotted 1/4 in.X 6 in. 9-GH300ME Steel Rule Metric 6 inch 9-4118 Screwdriver, Phillips #2, Stubby 9-XL9920 Xcelite-hex Blade.050 inch 9-41293 Screwdriver, Phillips #0 9-XL9921 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 inch 9-41294 Screwdriver, Phillips #1 9-XL9922 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/16 inch 9-41295 Screwdriver, Phillips #2 9-XL9923 Xcelite-hex Blade 3/32 inch 9-46677 Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric 9-XL9924 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 inch 9-34701 1/4 in. Standard.Socket set (19 pc) 9-XL9925 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 inch 9-43499 1/2 inch Socket 1/4 inch drive 9-XL9926 Xcelite-hex Blade 3/16 inch 9-4355 Flex Spinner 9-XL99764 Xcelite-hex Blade 7/64 9-43523 Breaker 9-XL99964 Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64 9-43531 6 inch Ext. 9-XLM60 Mini-screwdriver kit 10 - 4 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule
[Page 451] Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents (Continued) Tool ID Description Tool ID Description 9-65283 Case 8.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2 in. Deep 9-45072 Pliers 6 inch Diagonal 9-46696 Hex Keys 9-XL100X Wire Stripper/Cutter 5 inch - 100X 9-39829 Torpedo Level, Magnetic 9-XL87CG Pliers - very fine needle nose-87CG 9-38461 Hammer, Ball Peen, 4 oz 9-WEWDT-07 Weller-Soldering-Replacement Tip(1) 9-4280 Universal Joint 1/4 inch 9-WS175-E Wiss - Surgical Scissors 9-WEW60P3 Weller - Soldering Iron, 3 wire KH174 Hemostat 5 inch Straight 9-WECT5B6 Weller - Soldering Iron Tip KH175 Hemostat 5 inch curved 9-WEWDP12 Weller - Desoldering Pump 9-Z9480121 Alignment tool (red) 93383 Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA Bat.) 9-GH408 Tweezers 21576 Brush - Bristle 9-4516 Pliers 4 1/4 inch Diagonal Table 10-4 Overview of GE-2 Tool Kit Contents GE-2 Sears Kit (#99034) Tool ID Description Tool ID Description 9-45381 Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 inch 9-44067 Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive 9-45092 Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 inch 9-42679 Socket 10MM Hex for 1/2 in. drive (2273333) 9-42882 Punch, Pin 3/32 inch 9-44262 Extension 10 inch for 1/2 in. drive (2273405) 9-42884 Punch, Pin 5/32 inch 9-4258 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch Adapter 9-42886 Punch, Pin 1/4 inch 9-34374 3/8 inch Metric Socket Set - 12 PT 9-42973 Cold Chisel 1/2 inch 9-44311 16mm Socket 12 pt. 9-GH77 Center Punch Automatic 9-33485 Metal Socket Tray 9-GH890 File Handle, Adj. 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray 9-31276 File, Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray 9-31277 File, Half Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-52068 Tap and Drill Set 9-31263 File, Flat Mill 8 inch 9-52722 #6 Tap 21045C Close Quarter Saw 9-52723 #8 Tap 9-44604 Wrench, Adj 10 inch High Speed Drill Set 9-41587 Screwdriver 5/16 inch x 8 inch #36 Drill 9-41586 Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 inch #29 Drill 9-GH19512 Countersink 1/2 inch 9-44046 3/8 inch Socket Set 9-44741 12 PC Combination Wrench Set Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule 10 - 5
[Page 452] 10-4-2 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment 10-4-2-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance Table 10-5 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance Tool Part Number Comments Digital Volt Meter (DVM) Electric Safety Analyzer DALE 600 46-285652G1 For 120V Unit Electric Safety Analyzer DALE 46-328406G2 For 220V Units 600E Leakage Current Ultrasound Kit 2113015 For 120V and 220V Units 46–194427P231 Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 46–194427P279 V system Anti Static Kit 46–194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap 46–194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap 46–194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord 46–194427P278 120V Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner 46–194427P279 230V Air Filter 10-5-4-2 air intake Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests E7010GG 60 minute SVHS VCR Cassette E7010GF 120 minute SVHS VCR Head Cleaner See VCR user manual for requirements E8381AA blank 128 M disk E8381AB blank 230 M disk 3.5” MOD MEDIA 5.25” MOD Media 3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes 5.25” MOD Media Cleaner cleans the diskettes 3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads 5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit cleans the drive heads QIQ Phantom E8370RB RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS CD-RW Media For LOGIQ™ P6 B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements Disposable Gloves 10 - 6 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule
[Page 453] Section 10-5 System Maintenance 10-5-1 Preliminary Checks The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary. Table 10-6 System Checks 1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment. Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 29). Note all probes and system 2 Paperwork options. Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during 3 Power up power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed. 4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes. 5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel. 6 Presets Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW. Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule 10 - 7
[Page 454] 10-5-2 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary. 10-5-2-1 System Checks Table 10-7 System Functional Checks Chec k Step Description Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode B-Mode of operation. Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that CF-Mode affect this mode of operation. Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls Doppler Modes that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of M-Mode operation. Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast, *Applicable Software Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each Options options operation. Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels Xmit/Recv Elements are functional. Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK. Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions. refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area Measurements calculation accuracy. refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications. NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration. 10 - 8 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule
[Page 455] 10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options. Table 10-8 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks 1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 4 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device. Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications. 5 InSite/iLinq (Warranty & Contract Customers only) 6 Camera Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary. 7 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary. 8 ECG Verify basic operation with customer 10-5-3 Input Power 10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection Table 10-9 Mains Cable Inspection 1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system. 2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind. Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no 3 Verify strands may cause a short circuit. 4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional. 10-5-4 Cleaning 10-5-4-1 General Cleaning Table 10-10 General Cleaning Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful 1 Console not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console. 2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule 10 - 9
[Page 456] 10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning Table 10-11 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment Remove Filter 1 refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions. Cover The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter 2 Clean Filter is metal wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic vacuum or replace. 3 Install Filter Install the clean filter. NOTE: For your convenience or of the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number. 10-5-5 Physical Inspection Table 10-12 Physical Checks Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. refer to the LOGIQ™ P6 User 1 Labeling Manual for details. 2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks. 3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items. Control Panel Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that Movement it latches in position as required. Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, 5 Wheels & Brakes and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation. Cables & Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay Connectors special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Shielding & Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Covers Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning. 8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good. 9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights. 10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available. External 11 Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test. Microphone 10 - 10 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule
[Page 457] 10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics. 10-5-6-1 View the Logs 1.) Review the system error log for any problems. 2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future. 3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed. 10-5-7 Probe Maintenance 10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks Table 10-13 Probe Related Checks 1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets 2 Probes if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins 10-5-7-2 Basic Probe Care The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes. Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty. Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe. TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals. 10-5-7-3 Basic Probe Cleaning refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning. NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions. NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe. NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected. Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule 10 - 11
[Page 458] Section 10-6 Electrical Safety Tests 10-6-1 Safety Test Overview The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents. WARNING WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE. CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests. CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment. Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current. To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should: • Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way • Check probe leakage current: * Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes * Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes * whenever probe damage is suspected 10 - 12 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 459] 10-6-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. These limits are GEMS standards and in some cases are lower than the above standards listed. Table 10-14 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces Country Normal Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral USA N/A 0.3 mA 0.3 mA N/A Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA Table 10-15 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes Normal Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied USA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA N/A Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 5.0 mA Table 10-16 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections Normal Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA N/A 0.025 mA Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA NOTE: *Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage. The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site. These tests are: grounding continuity, chassis leakage current, probe leakage current, and ECG leakage current. All measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer Model 600/600E built by Dale Technology Corporation or equivalent device. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 13
[Page 460] 10-6-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used. Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester The Dale 600 has self-contained lamps designed for testing the outlet wiring arrangement. Plug the Dale 600 into each outlet to be tested comparing the lamp status. Combination of Lights REVERSE OPEN Condition CORRECT OPEN HOT/GROUND WIRING POLARITY GROUND HOT REVERSED Figure 10-2 Dale 600 Outlet Test NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected. 10 - 14 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 461] 10-6-4 Grounding Continuity CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1. Figure 10-3 Ground Continuity Test 10-6-4-1 Meter Procedure Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ P6 unit. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position. 5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position. 6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 15
[Page 462] 10-6-4-2 Dale 600 - Ground Continuity The Dale 600 measures line cord resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the meter’s Chassis Cable clamp. Test the grounding continuity of the system to all exposed metal parts in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1 procedure as above. refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self tests and operation. Record measured resistance of the grounding continuity. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 (Use any safety analyzer.) Figure 10-4 Dale 600 Ground Continuity Test 10 - 16 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 463] 10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test 10-6-5-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading.. CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit! CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. 10-6-5-2 Generic Procedure The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current. Figure 10-5 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-14. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 17
[Page 464] 10-6-5-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure When measuring system chassis currents with the Dale 600, always use the CHASSIS selection of the external/chassis function switch. This requires the ground clip lead and changing the meters switches in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1. refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self-test and operation. Record the highest leakage current measured. Follow these steps to test the unit for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ P6. 4.) Set the tester's “FUNCTION” switch to CHASSIS position. Figure 10-6 Ground and Chassis Leakage Current Test 5.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-17. Table 10-17 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition TEST CONDITION 1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle 2 caster support 3 Mounting screw for CRT housing 4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit 5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit 6.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data kept on site. 10 - 18 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 465] 10-6-5-4 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-14. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Table 10-18 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current Tester Neutral Test 1 Tester Polarity or Ground Probe Test 2 Test 3 Optional Optional Unit Power Switch Switch Connector caster CRT Test 4 Test 5 Enter Name of tested peripheral here: ON REV OPEN ON REV CLOSED OFF REV OPEN OFF REV CLOSED 10-6-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground 10-6-6-1 Definition This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition. Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 19
[Page 466] 10-6-6-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition. Appliance power switch Patient lead selector switch (if any) (use both "off" and "on" positions) The connection is at service entrance (activated as required) or on the supply side of a separately Polarity reversing switch derived system (use both positions) Patient connected leads Appliance H (Black) POWER OUTLET N (White) Internal circuitry Between each patient lead and ground G (Green) Building Insulating surface ground Current meter Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot "open" and "closed" positions) N = Neutral (grounded) G = Grounding conductor Figure 10-7 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads 10-6-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure The Dale 600 provides five snap type ECG buttons for testing patient leads. Snap on all patient leads to the meter and assure that the ground clip is connected to the system’s ground terminal. Select the meter’s LEAD-GND function. Select and test each ECG lead positions (except “ALL”) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in “PATIENT LEAD LEAKAGE” table in the “PM CHECKLIST”. Record the highest leakage current measured for each Power selection. Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit! Follow these steps to test the ECG module for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ P6 unit. 4.) Connect the patient leads to the corresponding snaps located at the upper front of the Dale 600/ 600E. Lead nomenclature for this test is not important. 10 - 20 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 467] 10-6-6-3Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d) Figure 10-8 ECG Leakage Current Test 5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO GROUND position to measure the patient lead to ground leakage current. 6.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations. Table 10-19 Testing Power Conditions ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch ON REVERSE CLOSED ON REVERSE OPEN OFF REVERSE CLOSED OFF REVERSE OPEN Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 21
[Page 468] 10-6-6-3Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Record the patient lead to ground leakage current measured on the data sheet. 8.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO LEAD position to measure the lead to lead leakage current. 9.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations. 10.)Record the lead to lead leakage current measured on the data sheet. 11.)Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD ISO position to measure the patient lead isolation current. 12.)Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations. 13.)Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST and read the isolation current. To apply the voltage to the lead safely, the voltage is only applied when the rocker switch is depressed to ISO TEST. 14.)Record the patient lead isolation current measured on the data sheet. 10-6-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured. 10-6-7-1 Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests NEUTRAL POLARITY 1.) Closed Normal 2.) Open Normal 3.) Closed Reversed 4.) Open Reversed 10-6-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation. CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests. 10 - 22 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 469] 10-6-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current Maximum Allowance Limit AC Power GROUND Source GROUND OPEN CLOSED Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test 115V 10uA 10uA and 220/240V 500uA 10uA Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test Table 10-21 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current AC Power Maximum Source Allowance Limit 115V 20uA Patient Lead Isolation Current Test 220/240V 5mA Table 10-22 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current Tester Tester Tester Lead Selector ECG Polarity Ground Power Switch Switch RL RA LA LL C ON REVERSE CLOSED ON REVERSE OPEN OFF REVERSE CLOSED OFF REVERSE OPEN Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 23
[Page 470] 10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 10-6-9-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface. 10-6-9-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition. POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH H (BLACK) PROBE CONSOLE N (WHITE) POWER OUTLET G (GREEN) MOMENTARY SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST METER Figure 10-9 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. 10-6-9-3 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins. The probe's imaging area is immersed in a saline solution along with a grounding probe from the meter to complete the current path. Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds a free ion to the water, making it conductive. Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt or 1/2 gram salt per 1 liter of water. If saline is not available, a mixture of 1 quart water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly, will substitute. To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Connect the probe for test with the meter's appropriate adapter. 4.) Plug the saline probe into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector. 5.) Plug the probe adapter into the meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”. 10 - 24 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 471] 10-6-9-3Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter (cont’d) Figure 10-10 Transducer Source Leakage Current Test 6.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position. 7.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath. 8.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half. 9.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-23 for every transducer. 11.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 25
[Page 472] 10-6-9-4 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure Figure 10-11 Check Without Probe Adapter Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the external probe into the meter's (Dale 600) “EXTERNAL” connector. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position. 5.) Connect the probe for test with the connector of the console. 6.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath. 7.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half. 8.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 9.) Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-23 for every transducer. 10.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data. 10 - 26 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 473] 10-6-9-5 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-15 and Table 10- 16. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged Table 10-23 Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current Transducer Tested: Tester Power Polarity Tester GROUND or Unit Power Switch NEUTRAL Switch Measurement ON REV OPEN ON REV CLOSED OFF REV OPEN OFF REV CLOSED Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 27
[Page 474] Section 10-7 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... CHASSIS FAILS Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part. Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead. NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected. PROBE FAILS Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list. If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity. If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe. PERIPHERAL FAILS Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. STILL FAILS If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement. NEW UNIT If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation. ECG FAILS Inspect cables for damage or poor connections. 10 - 28 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 475] ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE Customer Name: System ID: Dispatch Number / Date Performed: Warranty/Contract/HBS System Type Model Number: Serial Number: Manufacture Date: Probe 1: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 2: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 3: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 4: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 5: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 6: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 7: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 8: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 9: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: * Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other FUNCTIONAL CHECKS PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING OK? or Physical Inspection and Cleaning Functional Check (if applicable) N/A (if applicable) Inspect Clean B-Mode Function Console Doppler Modes Function Monitor CF-Mode Function Touch Panel M-Mode Function Air Filter Applicable Software Options Probe Holders Applicable Hardware Options External I/O Control Panel Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks Monitor Cables and Connectors GE Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-RW, MOD, Touch Panel Printers) Measurement Accuracy GE Approved Peripherals COMMENTS: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10 - 29
[Page 476] ELECTRICAL SAFETY Max Value Value Electrical Test Performed Allowed Measured OK? Comments Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.) System Ground Continuity Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Ground) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Lead) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Isolation) Peripheral 1 Leakage Current Peripheral 1Ground Continuity Peripheral 2 Leakage Current Peripheral 2Ground Continuity Peripheral 3 Leakage Current Peripheral 3Ground Continuity PROBES Probe Number Max Value Max Value (from previous page) Allowed Measured OK? Comments Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9: Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected. Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________ 10 - 30 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 477]
[Page 478] © 2004 and 2008, General Electric Company. GE Medical Systems, a General Electric Company, going to market as GE Healthcare. 3200 N. Grandview Boulevard Waukesha, Wisconsin 53149 USA www.gehealthcare.com